www.carburetor-manual.com "The ABC's of Carburetion" Would you like some Free Manuals?

www.carburetor-manual.com "The ABC's of Carburetion" Would you like some Free Manuals?

www.carburetor-manual.com

Would you like some Free Manuals?

http://carburetor-manual.com/free-shop-manual-club-t-13.html

Also visit http://freeshopmanual.com

for more Free Manuals

Also Visit my website for 7 FREE Download Manuals starting with this one.

"The ABC's of Carburetion"

Click Here Now

file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/Tim/Desktop/carburetor-manual-welcome/index.htm[4/25/2009 11:42:20 AM]

yellow blue

The 1999 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner’s Manual

1

-

1

Seats and Restraint Systems

This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “SRS” system.

2

-

1

Features and Controls

This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.

3

-

1

Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.

4

-

1

Your Driving and the Road

Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.

5

-

1

Problems on the Road

This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.

6

-

1

Service and Appearance Care

Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.

7

-

1

Maintenance Schedule

This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.

8

-

1

Customer Assistance Information

This section tells you how to contact Pontiac for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.

It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8

-

12.

9

-

1

Index

Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

i

We support voluntary technician certification.

yellow blue

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,

PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem and the name

GRAND PRIX are registered trademarks of General

Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name

“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Pontiac

Division whenever it appears in this manual.

Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it.

For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a

French Language Manual:

Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez votre concessionaire ou au:

DGN Marketing Services Ltd.

1577 Meyerside Dr.

Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9

Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 10285614 A First Edition

ii

E

Copyright General Motors Corporation 1998

All Rights Reserved

yellow blue

How to Use this Manual

Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly.

Index

A good place to look for what you need is the Index in back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.

Safety Warnings and Symbols

You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.

We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.

CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means “Don’t,”

“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage Warnings

Also, in this book you will find these notices:

NOTICE:

These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle.

yellow blue

In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.

But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words.

You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

iv

yellow blue

Vehicle Symbols

These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.

For example, these symbols are used on an original battery:

CAUTION

POSSIBLE

INJURY

These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven:

These symbols have to do with your lamps:

MASTER

LIGHTING

SWITCH

These symbols are on some of your controls:

WINDSHIELD

WIPER

PROTECT

EYES BY

SHIELDING

DOOR LOCK

UNLOCK

TURN

SIGNALS

WINDSHIELD

WASHER

PARKING

LAMPS CAUSTIC

BATTERY

ACID COULD

CAUSE

BURNS

FASTEN

SEAT

BELTS

HAZARD

WARNING

FLASHER

WINDSHIELD

DEFROSTER

AVOID

SPARKS OR

FLAMES

POWER

WINDOW

DAYTIME

RUNNING

LAMPS

REAR

WINDOW

DEFOGGER

SPARK OR

FLAME

COULD

EXPLODE

BATTERY

AIR BAG FOG LAMPS

VENTILATING

FAN

These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights:

ENGINE

COOLANT

TEMP

BATTERY

CHARGING

SYSTEM

BRAKE

COOLANT

ENGINE OIL

PRESSURE

ANTI-LOCK

BRAKES

Here are some other symbols you may see:

FUSE

LIGHTER

HORN

SPEAKER

FUEL

v

NOTES

vi

yellow blue

yellow blue

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.

1

-

2

1

-

8

Seats and Controls

Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone

1

-

12

Here Are Questions Many People Ask About

Safety Belts

-and the Answers

1

-

13

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

1

-

14

Driver Position

1

-

21

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

1

-

22

Right Front Passenger Position

1

-

22

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

1

-

29

Center Passenger Position

1

-

30

Rear Seat Passengers

1

-

33

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children

1

and Small Adults

-

35

Children

1

-

38

Child Restraints

1

-

50

Larger Children

1

-

53

Safety Belt Extender

1

-

53

Checking Your Restraint Systems

1

-

53

Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash

1-

1-1

yellow blue

Seats and Seat Controls

This section tells you how to adjust the seats and explains reclining seatbacks and head restraints.

Manual Front Seat

CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the lever under the front of the seat up, using a twisting motion. This will unlock the seat. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the lever. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place.

1-2

6-Way Power Driver’s Seat (If Equipped)

This switch is designed to control the movements of your seat cushion. It is located on the left side of the driver’s seat cushion.

Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)

yellow blue

To move the seat forward or rearward, push the switch forward or rearward. To raise or lower the seat, push the switch up or down. To raise or lower the front portion of your seat, push the front of the switch up or down. To raise or lower the rear portion of your seat, push the rear of the switch up or down.

The knob that controls this feature is located on the right side of the driver’s seat, about halfway down the seatback. Turn the knob toward the front of the vehicle to increase lumbar support. Turn the knob toward the rear of the vehicle to decrease lumbar support.

1-3

4-Way Power Lumbar Driver’s Seat

(If Equipped)

yellow blue

Heated Seat (If Equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped, the heated seat switch is on the center console, just behind the open storage bin.

If your vehicle is equipped, there will be a control switch on the left side of the driver’s seat cushion, just in front of the reclining seatback lever. To increase or decrease lumbar support, push the switch forward or rearward. To adjust the lumbar support up or down, push the switch up or down.

Press LO to warm the seat to a lower temperature. Press

HI to warm the seat to a higher temperature. To turn this feature off, place the switch in the center position.

1-4

yellow blue

Reclining Front Seatbacks

Lift the lever to release the seatback, then move the seatback to where you want it. Release the lever to lock the seatback in place. Pull up on the lever without pushing on the seatback, and the seatback will move forward.

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.

CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this.

CAUTION: (Continued)

1-5

CAUTION: (Continued)

The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.

This could cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.

yellow blue

Head Restraints

Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

Seatback Latches (2-Door Models)

1-6

On two

door models, the right front seat is designed to make it easy to get in and out of the rear seat. Tilt the right seatback fully forward. The whole seat will now slide forward. If the seat will not tilt, lift the seatback latch, located on the back of the seat to tilt the seatback forward. The whole seat will now slide forward.

After someone gets into the rear seat area, move the right front seatback to its original position. Then move the seat rearward until it locks.

To get out, tilt the seatback fully forward.

CAUTION:

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

yellow blue

Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone

This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts.

And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS), or air bag system.

CAUTION:

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.

1-7

CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.

yellow blue

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.

But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!

Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety

Belt Reminder Light” in the Index.)

1-8

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

yellow blue

1-9

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn’t stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.

In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

1-10

yellow blue

yellow blue

or the instrument panel ...

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.

You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make such good sense.

1-11

Here Are Questions Many People Ask

About Safety Belts

--

and the Answers

Q:

Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

A:

You could be

--

whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q:

If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to wear safety belts?

A:

Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts

--

not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.

yellow blue

Q:

If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts?

A:

You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident

--

even one that isn’t your fault

--

you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than

40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-12

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

Adults

This part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.

First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has.

We’ll start with the driver position.

yellow blue

Driver Position

This part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder Belt

The driver has a lap

shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight.

1-13

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.

Don’t let it get twisted.

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt

Extender” at the end of this section.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

yellow blue

1-14

yellow blue

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-15

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster (4

-

Door Models)

Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you.

yellow blue

To move it down, squeeze the release lever and the shoulder belt guide as shown and move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without squeezing the release lever to make sure it has locked into position.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

1-16

Q:

What’s wrong with this?

yellow blue

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

A:

The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way.

1-17

Q:

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen.

The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.

Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

yellow blue

A:

The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-18

Q:

What’s wrong with this?

A:

The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

yellow blue

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury.

Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.

You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.

1-19

Q:

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

yellow blue

A:

The belt is twisted across the body.

1-20

yellow blue

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap

shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-21

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger Position

To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt

--

except for one thing.

If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and start again.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) or air bag system.

Your vehicle has “Next Generation” frontal air bags

--

one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger.

Next Generation frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very quickly if they are to do their job and comply with federal regulations.

1-22

yellow blue

Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system:

CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren’t wearing your safety belt

--

even if you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. All air bags

--

even Next Generation air bags

--

are designed to work with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear, side or low

speed frontal crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants, Next Generation air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly

--

whether or not there’s an air bag for that person.

CAUTION:

Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you would be if you were leaning forward, it could seriously injure you. This is true even with Next Generation frontal air bags.

Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with Next Generation air bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. This is true even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags plus lap

shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them.

Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide.

Always secure children properly in your vehicle.

To read how, see the part of this manual called

“Children” and see the caution labels on the sunvisors and the right front passenger’s safety belt.

1-23

There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows SRS

AIR BAG.

How the Air Bag System Works

The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information.

yellow blue

Where are the air bags?

The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

1-24

The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side.

yellow blue

CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and an air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put anything between an occupant and an air bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering.

1-25

When should an air bag inflate?

An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near

frontal crash. The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed

“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about 12 to 18 mph (19 to 29 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.

Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near

frontal impacts.

yellow blue

What makes an air bag inflate?

In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger.

How does an air bag restrain?

In moderate to severe frontal or near

frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near

frontal collisions.

1-26

What will you see after an air bag inflates?

After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module

--

the steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag

--

will be hot for a short time.

The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

CAUTION:

When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.

This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.

If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.

yellow blue

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag.

D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.

A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system, when the sensors are activated and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.

D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system. Improper service can mean that your air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.

1-27

NOTICE:

If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not work properly. You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings.

CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air bag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle

Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.

There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.

Your dealer and the Grand Prix Service Manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and

Owner Publications” in the Index.

The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

yellow blue

1-28

yellow blue

Center Passenger Position

Lap Belt

If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone can sit in the center positions.

When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.

1-29

yellow blue

Rear Seat Passengers

It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!

Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap

shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Lap

-

Shoulder Belt

The positions next to the windows have lap

shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

1-30

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.

Don’t let it get twisted.

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

yellow blue

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety

Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-31

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

yellow blue

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.

These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

1-32

yellow blue

There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for

Children and Small Adults

Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head.

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storage clip.

1-33

yellow blue

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.

The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top.

1-34

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions” earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out from the guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate the guide and clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed.

yellow blue

Children

Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.

In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.

Smaller Children and Babies

CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. This is true even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags plus lap

shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them.

Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle.

1-35

CAUTION:

Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint. The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child. A very young child’s hip bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force right on the child’s abdomen, which could cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint.

yellow blue

Infants need complete support, including support for the head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in a rear

facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint.

This is so important that many hospitals today won’t release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an infant restraint available for the baby’s first trip in a motor vehicle.

1-36

CAUTION:

Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much

--

until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash

CAUTION: (Continued)

yellow blue

CAUTION: (Continued) at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12

lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240

lb. (110 kg) force on your arms. The baby would be almost impossible to hold.

Secure the baby in an infant restraint.

1-37

Child Restraints

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have protection provided by appropriate restraints.

Q:

What are the different types of add

on child restraints?

A:

Add

on child restraints are available in four basic types. When selecting a child restraint, take into consideration not only the child’s weight and size, but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.

An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed, make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle.

yellow blue

1-38

yellow blue

A rear

facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear

facing infant restraints are designed for infants of up to about

20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head, neck and body can have the support they need in a frontal crash. Some infant seats come in two parts

--

the base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable.

1-39

1-40

yellow blue

A forward

facing child restraint (C

-

E) positions a child upright to face forward in the vehicle.

These forward

facing restraints are designed to help protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs.

(9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches

(66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around four years of age. One type, a convertible restraint, is designed to be used either as a rear

facing infant seat or a forward

facing child seat.

yellow blue

A booster seat (F, G) is designed for children who are about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs.

(18 to 27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about four to eight years of age. A booster seat is designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.

Booster seats with shields use lap

only belts; however, booster seats without shields use lap

shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window.

1-41

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.

The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s manual and the child restraint instructions are important, so if either one of these is not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

Where to Put the Restraint

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at

General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear

facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:

CAUTION:

A child in a rear

facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags.

This is because the back of the rear

facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear

facing child restraint in a rear seat.

You may secure a forward

facing child restraint in the right front seat, but before you do, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

yellow blue

1-42

Top Strap

CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger air bag if it inflates, even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags.

Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It’s always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat. You may secure a forward

facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat, but before you do, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle

--

even when no child is in it.

Canadian law requires that forward

facing child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored.

yellow blue

1-43

If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, your dealer can obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation instructions specifically designed for this vehicle. The dealer can then install the anchor for you.

This work will be done for you free of charge. Or, you may install the anchor yourself using the instructions provided in the kit.

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Outside Seat Position

yellow blue

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

You’ll be using the lap

shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the restraint on the seat.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-44

yellow blue

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward

facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

1-45

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the Center

Rear Seat Position

You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.

CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger air bag if it inflates even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags.

Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It’s always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat. You may secure a forward

facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat, but before you do, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.

yellow blue

1-46

yellow blue

1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt.

2. Put the restraint on the seat.

3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward

facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

1-47

yellow blue

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position

Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never put a rear

facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:

CAUTION:

A child in a rear

facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags.

This is because the back of the rear

facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear

facing child restraint in the rear seat.

Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a forward

facing child restraint in the right front seat.

You’ll be using the lap

shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward

facing child restraint. (See

“Seats” in the Index.)

2. Put the restraint on the seat.

1-48

yellow blue

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock.

1-49

Larger Children

yellow blue

6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint.

You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

1-50

Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap

shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

yellow blue

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly.

D Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash.

D Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are.

CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt.

The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces.

In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.

Q:

What if a child is wearing a lap

shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck?

A:

Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see

“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.

If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to place the child in the center seat position, the one that has only a lap belt.

1-51

1-52

CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap

shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

yellow blue

Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.

Checking Your Restraint Systems

Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)

yellow blue

Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash

If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.

But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision.

If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.

1-53

NOTES

1-54

yellow blue

yellow blue

Section 2 Features and Controls

Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly

--

and what to do if you have a problem.

2

-

2

Keys

2

-

4

2

-

8

Door Locks

Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)

2

-

12

Multifunction Alarm Locks and

Lighting Choices

2

-

22

Trunk

2

-

23

Theft

2

-

24

Content Theft

-

Deterrent (If Equipped)

2

-

26

New Vehicle “Break

-

In”

2

-

26

Ignition Positions

2

-

28

Starting Your Engine

2

-

30

Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)

2

-

32

Automatic Transaxle Operation

2

-

36

Parking Brake

2

-

37

Shifting Into PARK (P)

2

-

40

Shifting Out of PARK (P)

2

-

43

Parking Over Things That Burn

2

-

43

Engine Exhaust

2

-

44

Running Your Engine While You’re Parked

2

-

45

Power Windows

2

-

46

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

2

-

51

Exterior Lamps

2

-

54

Interior Lamps

2

-

57

Mirrors

2

-

59

Storage Compartments

2

-

64

OnStar

R

System (Option)

2

-

65

Sunroof (If Equipped)

2

-

66

The Instrument Panel

--

Your Information

System

2

-

70

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators

2

-

82

Head

-

Up Display (Option)

2

-

86

Driver Information Center (DIC)

(If Equipped)

2-

2-1

Keys

CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed.

They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-2

yellow blue

The master key can be used for the ignition, as well as all door locks and storage compartments.

The valet key can be used for the ignition and the two side doors only. It will not open the trunk, glove box or fold

down rear seat trunk access panel (if equipped).

yellow blue

When a new vehicle is delivered, it will come with a bar coded tag attached to the key ring.

This tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the code in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have new ones made easily using this code.

If you need a new ignition key, contact your dealer who can obtain the correct key code. Remember to carry the pre

cut emergency key which Pontiac sends after delivery.

(This service is not available in Canada.) In an emergency, call Pontiac Roadside Assistance at 1

-

800

-

ROADSIDE

(1

-

800

-

762

-

3743). (In Canada call 1

-

800

-

268

-

6800.)

NOTICE:

Your vehicle has a number of features that can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have extra keys.

2-3

Door Locks

CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

Passengers

--

especially children

--

can easily open the doors and fall out. When a door is locked, the inside handle won’t open it.

Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.

This may not be so obvious: You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

To unlock either front door from outside the vehicle with your key, insert it fully into the door key cylinder and turn it counterclockwise.

You can lock either front door from outside the vehicle with your key by inserting it fully into the door key cylinder and turning it clockwise.

yellow blue

To unlock either front or rear door from inside the vehicle, push the lock lever back.

To lock either front or rear door from inside the vehicle, push the lock lever forward.

2-4

Power Door Locks

yellow blue

To unlock all doors from inside the vehicle, press the front of the power door lock switch on either front door.

If your vehicle is equipped with a Content

Theft

-

Deterrent system, the power door lock switch will not unlock the doors until the system is disarmed. See

“Content Theft

-

Deterrent” in the Index for more details.

You can lock all doors from inside the vehicle by pressing the rear of the power lock switch on either front door. If your vehicle is equipped with a Content

Theft

-

Deterrent system, the power lock switch may cause the system to arm (see “Content Theft

-

Deterrent” in the Index for more details).

To unlock any door from outside the vehicle with your key, insert it fully into the key cylinder and turn it counterclockwise. This will unlock only the door you are operating.

2-5

Last Door Closed Locking

The Last Door Closed Locking feature makes it more convenient for you to use your power door locks to lock all the doors when leaving your vehicle. When any door is open, the first time you attempt to lock the doors using the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped) this will result in three chimes to signal that the Last Door Closed Locking feature is being used. All doors can be opened for any reason for five seconds from the time the last door has been closed. Five seconds after the last door is closed, all doors will lock. You can lock the doors immediately by using the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).

The Last Door Closed Locking feature will not occur and doors will not be locked as a result of this feature when the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY. The Last Door

Closed Locking feature is enabled from the factory.

To turn the Last Door Closed Locking feature on or off, see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.

yellow blue

Automatic Door Locks

All of the doors will lock automatically when you move your shift lever out of PARK (P). All doors will unlock automatically when the ignition is turned off while the shift lever is in PARK (P). If you prefer to have your doors unlocked automatically at any time, see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.

If someone needs to get in or out of the vehicle after the doors have been automatically locked, place the shift lever into PARK (P). Unlock all doors by using the power door lock switch or unlock just the door you want by using the inside lever. If you have programmed your

Automatic Door Locks (see “Locks and Lighting

Choices” in the Index) to unlock the doors when the shift lever is shifted into PARK (P), then the doors will be automatically unlocked for you. The doors will automatically lock when you move your shift lever out of PARK (P) with the ignition on.

If you don’t want the doors to unlock automatically when you turn the ignition off, see “Locks and Lighting

Choices” in the Index.

2-6

Rear Door Security Locks (4-Door Models)

Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks that help prevent passengers from opening the rear doors of your vehicle from the inside. To use one of these locks:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. On the inside of the rear door will be a lock.

Insert your master key into this lock and turn it counterclockwise. This will engage the safety lock.

3. Close the door.

4. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.

yellow blue

The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when this feature is in use. If you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on, unlock the door from the inside and then open the door from the outside.

Lockout Prevention

The Lockout Deterrent feature makes it difficult for you to lock your keys in your vehicle. If the driver’s door is open while the keys are in the ignition, you will not be able to use your power door lock switch.

This feature cannot guarantee that you’ll never be locked out of your vehicle. If you don’t leave the keys in the ignition, or if you use the manual door lock, you could still lock your keys inside your vehicle. Always remember to take your keys with you.

To turn this feature on or off, see “Locks and Lighting

Choices” in the Index.

Leaving Your Vehicle

If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and close the door.

2-7

Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped, you can lock and unlock your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.

yellow blue

Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS

-

210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

3

-

Button Key Fob 4

-

Button Key Fob

2-8

This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to

30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

D Check to determine if battery replacement or resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions that follow.

D Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather.

D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.

Operation

Remote Driver’s Door and All Door Unlock

When you press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter, only the driver’s door will unlock. If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds, all the doors will unlock. If you would like all doors to unlock the first time you press UNLOCK, see “Locks and Lighting

Choices” in the Index. If your vehicle is equipped with

yellow blue

the Content Theft

-

Deterrent system, the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will disarm the system. See “Content Theft

-

Deterrent” in the

Index for more details.

Remote All Door Lock

To lock all doors, press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter (see “Power Door Locks” in the Index for more details on power door lock features). If your vehicle is equipped with the Content Theft

-

Deterrent system, the LOCK button may arm the system. See

“Content Theft

-

Deterrent” in the Index for more details.

Remote Lock/Unlock Confirmation (If Equipped)

This feature provides feedback to the holder of the remote keyless entry transmitter that a command has been received by the keyless entry receiver. To signal that a command has been received, the headlamps will flash and the horn will sound briefly. To program the various modes available, see “Locks and Lighting

Choices” in the Index.

Remote Alarm (If Equipped)

When you press the horn button on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the headlamps will flash and the horn will sound. This will allow you to attract attention, if needed.

2-9

Remote Trunk Release

Press the trunk symbol on your remote keyless entry transmitter to open your trunk. The transaxle must be in

PARK (P) for this feature to operate.

Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle

Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.

If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it.

Battery Replacement

Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the battery.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.

2-10

To replace the battery:

1. Insert a flat object like a dime into the slot on the side of the transmitter and twist to separate the halves.

2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not use metal flanges to “pop out” the battery.

3. Put the new battery into the transmitter as shown on the transmitter. Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.

4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the halves are snapped together tightly so water will not get in.

yellow blue

5. Check the transmitter operation. If needed, follow the instructions on resynchronization.

Resynchronization

Your remote keyless entry system uses a continually changing code for increased security. Normally, the receiver in your vehicle will keep track of this changing code.

D Loss of synchronization will occur if the transmitter is activated more than 256 times while out of range of the vehicle.

D Loss of synchronization will occur after battery replacement if the transmitter is immediately activated more than 16 times while out of range of the vehicle.

If your remote keyless entry transmitter has stopped working, you may need to resynchronize the transmitter to the vehicle receiver. To do this, press the LOCK and

UNLOCK buttons together and hold for at least seven seconds (or until the horn sounds, when equipped with

Content Theft

-

Deterrent).

If attempts to resynchronize your transmitter to the vehicle are not successful, you may need to have your dealer match the transmitter to the vehicle. See

“Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle” in the Index.

2-11

Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices

Your vehicle’s locks and lighting systems can be programmed with several different features. The features you can program depend on the options that came with your vehicle. The following chart shows the features that can be programmed. To determine which features your vehicle is equipped with, follow the steps listed for entering the programming mode.

yellow blue

2-12

Entering Programming Mode

To program features, your vehicle must be in this programming mode. Follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition key to LOCK or OFF.

2. Remove the MALL PGM fuse from the instrument panel fuse block. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.

3. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY.

4. Count the number of chimes you hear. You will hear two to four chimes, depending on vehicle features.

Refer to the chart shown previously for available programming choices.

You can now program your choices. After programming a feature, you can exit the programming mode at anytime.

Exiting Programming Mode

To exit programming mode, turn the key from

ACCESSORY to OFF and put the MALL PGM fuse back into the instrument panel fuse block.

yellow blue

Delayed Illumination and Exit Lighting

With Delayed Illumination, the interior lamps will stay on for about 25 seconds after all doors are closed.

With Exit Lighting. the interior lamps will come on and stay on for about 25 seconds whenever you remove the key from the ignition.

To customize these features to your preference, see “Programmable Modes” following.

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes.

Mode 1: Both Features Off (The interior lamps will turn on or off at the same instant that a door is opened or closed.)

Mode 2: Delayed Illumination Only (The interior lamps will stay on for about 25 seconds after all the doors are closed, or until you lock the doors.)

Mode 3: Exit Lighting Only (The interior lamps will come on whenever you remove the key from the ignition and stay on for about 25 seconds, or until you lock the doors.)

Mode 4: Both Features On (This combines modes 2 and 3.)

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in mode 4.

2-13

To change the mode do the following:

1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming

Mode” listed previously.

2. Turn the interior lamps dial all the way clockwise and then back slightly counterclockwise.

3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for. You change the mode by turning the interior lamps dial all the way clockwise and then back slightly counterclockwise.

4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

Automatic Door Locks

With Automatic Door Locks, all doors will automatically lock when you shift out of PARK (P) and automatically unlock when the ignition is turned to OFF.

To customize these features to your preference, see

“Programmable Modes” following.

yellow blue

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes.

Mode 1: Both Features Off (Automatic door locking and unlocking are disabled.) You will always need to lock your doors manually, before driving to increase occupant safety.

D All doors will lock when you press the power door lock switch rearward or when you press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).

D All doors will unlock when you press the power door lock switch forward or when you press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).

Mode 2: Automatic Door Locking Only

D Automatic Door Unlocking: The automatic door unlock feature is turned off.

D Automatic Door Locking: Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the driver’s door closed, all doors will lock automatically.

2-14

Mode 3: Automatic Unlocking with the Ignition Off

D Automatic Door Unlocking: Turn off the ignition with the transaxle in PARK (P) and all doors will unlock automatically.

D Automatic Door Locking: Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the driver’s door closed and all doors will lock automatically.

Mode 4: Automatic Unlocking and Locking with

Transaxle in PARK (P)

D Automatic Door Unlocking: Shift into PARK (P) with the ignition on and all doors will unlock automatically.

D Automatic Door Locking: Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the driver’s door closed and all doors will lock automatically.

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in mode 3.

To change the mode do the following:

1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming

Mode” listed previously.

2. Press LOCK on the power door lock switch.

3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for. You change the mode by pressing LOCK on the power door lock switch again.

yellow blue

4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

Last Door Closed Locking and Lockout

Prevention

With the Last Door Closed Locking and Lockout

Prevention features, your vehicle will do the following.

D If you leave your key in the ignition and leave the driver’s door open, you won’t be able to power lock the doors.

D When you press LOCK on the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped) while any door is open, the doors will not lock. Instead you will hear three chimes, which let you know that the Last Door Closed Locking feature is in operation. Five seconds after all the doors are closed, all the doors will automatically lock.

To customize these features to your preference, see

“Programmable Modes” following.

2-15

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes.

Mode 1: Both Features Off (Doors will always lock immediately when you press LOCK on the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter, if equipped.)

Mode 2: Lockout Prevention Only (If you leave your key in the ignition with the driver’s door open, you will not be able to lock the doors using your power locks.)

Mode 3: Last Door Closed Locking Only (If the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped) is used to lock the vehicle while any door is open and the key is out of the ignition, you will hear three chimes. The doors will not lock. Five seconds after the last door is closed, all doors will lock.)

Mode 4: Both Features On (This combines modes 2 and 3.)

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in mode 4.

To change the mode do the following:

1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming

Mode” listed previously.

2. Press unlock on the power door lock switch.

yellow blue

3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for. You change the mode by pressing unlock again.

4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

Remote Driver’s Unlock Control

With the Remote Driver’s Unlock Control feature, you can program your vehicle to do the following:

D When you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter, the driver’s door will unlock and,

D when you press LOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter again within five seconds, all doors will unlock.

2-16

To customize these features to your preference, see

“Programmable Modes” following.

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes.

Mode 1: Remote All Doors Unlock (When you press

UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter, all doors will unlock.)

Mode 2: Remote Driver’s Door and All Doors Unlock

(When you press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter once, the driver’s door will unlock. If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds, all doors will unlock.)

The vehicle comes with this feature set in mode 2.

To change the mode do the following:

1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming

Mode” listed previously.

2. Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode the vehicle is set for.

You change the mode by pressing UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter again.

yellow blue

4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation

With the Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation feature, you can program your vehicle to do the following:

D When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter, to unlock your vehicle, your headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received. If you press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter again within five seconds, the horn will sound briefly and the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know your vehicle is locked and,

D when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock your vehicle, your headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received.

2-17

To customize these features to your preference, see

“Programmable Modes” following.

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes.

Mode 1: Both Features Off (Remote lock and unlock confirmation are disabled.)

Mode 2: Exterior Lamps Flash Only

D Remote Lock Confirmation: When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the vehicle, the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command is received.

D Remote Unlock Confirmation: When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle or open the trunk, the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know when the command is received.

Mode 3: Exterior Lamps Flash and Horn Sound

D Remote Lock Confirmation: When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the vehicle, the horn will sound briefly and the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command is received.

D Remote Unlock Confirmation: When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle or open the trunk, the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command is received.

Mode 4:Exterior Lamps and Horn Sound (on second

LOCK press only)

D Remote Lock Confirmation: When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the vehicle, the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command is received. The horn will sound briefly and the headlamps will flash briefly if you press the

LOCK button again within five seconds.

D Remote Unlock Confirmation: When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle or open the trunk, the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command is received.

The vehicle comes with this feature set in mode 4.

To change the mode do the following:

1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming

Mode” listed previously.

2. Press the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

yellow blue

2-18

3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode the vehicle is set for.

You change the mode by pressing LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter again.

4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

Content Theft-Deterrent System

With the Content Theft

-

Deterrent System, if anyone damages or enters your vehicle while the system is armed, an alarm will sound and your headlamps will flash for two minutes.

To customize these features to your preference, see

“Programmable Modes” following.

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes.

yellow blue

Mode 1: Damage Detection with Reduced Sensitivity

(If anyone seriously damages the vehicle, tampers with the trunk lock or opens a door while the Content

Theft

-

Deterrent system is armed, an alarm will sound and the headlamps will flash for up to two minutes).

Mode 2: Damage Detection Off (If anyone tampers with the trunk lock or opens a door while the Content

Theft

-

Deterrent system is armed, an alarm will sound and the headlamps will flash for up to two minutes.)

Mode 3: All Off (The Content Theft

-

Deterrent system is always disarmed.)

Mode 4: Damage Detection with Normal Sensitivity (If anyone damages the vehicle, tampers with the trunk lock or opens the door while the Content Theft

-

Deterrent system is armed, an alarm will sound and the headlamps will flash for up to two minutes.)

The vehicle comes with this feature set in mode 4.

To change the mode do the following:

1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming

Mode” listed previously.

2. Turn the parking lamps on, then off.

2-19

3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode the vehicle is set for.

You change the mode by turning the parking lamps on, then off again.

4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

Arming and Disarming the Content

Theft-Deterrent System

To arm and disarm the Content Theft

-

Deterrent system, the system must be turned on by using Modes 1, 2 or 4 listed previously in this section under “Content

Theft

-

Deterrent System.”

With the Arming and Disarming feature, you can do the following:

D Arm the system when you lock the doors using either power door lock switch while any door is open and the key is removed form the ignition.

D Arm the system when you lock the doors with your remote keyless entry transmitter and the key is removed form the ignition.

2-20

D Disarm the system when you unlock the doors with your key or remote keyless entry transmitter.

To customize these features to your preference, see

“Programmable Modes” following.

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes.

Mode 1: Power Door Lock Switch Arming Off

D The Content Theft

-

Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter. The key must be removed from the ignition when you lock the doors or the Content

Theft

-

Deterrent system will not arm.

D The Content Theft

-

Deterrent system will disarm when you unlock the doors with the keys or the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Mode 2: Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter

Arm/Disarm Only

D The Content Theft

-

Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter. The key must be removed from the ignition when you lock the doors or the content theft

deterrent system will not arm.

yellow blue

D The Content Theft

-

Deterrent system will disarm when you unlock the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter.

NOTE: While this mode provides increased security, it can be a problem if the remote keyless entry transmitter is damaged, lost or if it fails to operate for any reason while the Content Theft

-

Deterrent system is armed. The

Content Theft

-

Deterrent system must be disarmed for the engine to run and while in Mode 2, the key can no longer disarm the system.

Mode 3: Standard Arming and Disarming

D The Content Theft

-

Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors using either power door lock switch while any door is open and the key is removed from the ignition.

D The Content Theft

-

Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors with your remote keyless entry transmitter. The key must be removed from the ignition when you lock the doors or the Content

Theft

-

Deterrent system will not arm.

D The Content Theft

-

Deterrent system will disarm when you unlock the doors with the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Your vehicle comes with this feature in mode 1.

yellow blue

To change the mode do the following:

1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming

Mode” listed previously.

2. Insert your key fully into any door key cylinder and turn it to the unlock position.

This step is necessary to prevent accidental programming of this feature to Mode 2. Do not program this feature to Mode 2 without first reading the note contained in the description for that mode.

The door key lock cylinder must remain in the unlock position during Steps 2 through 4.

3. Press the horn symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

4. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode the vehicle is set for.

You change the mode by pressing the horn symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter again.

5. Repeat Step 3 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want.

6. Remove the key from the door key cylinder.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions earlier in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

2-21

Trunk

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.

If you must drive with the trunk open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the trunk:

D Make sure all other windows are shut.

D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed with the setting on VENT. That will force outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.

D If you have air outlets on or under the

instrument panel, open them all the way.

See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

yellow blue

Trunk Lock

To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the master key and turn the key clockwise. You can also press the trunk symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter

(if equipped).

Remote Trunk Release (If Equipped)

Press the button behind the glove box door to unlock the trunk from inside the vehicle. The shift lever must be in PARK (P) for the remote trunk release button to work.

2-22

Theft

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.

Although your vehicle has a number of theft

deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.

Key in the Ignition

If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves

--

so don’t do it.

When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.

Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignition and transaxle. And remember to lock the doors.

Parking at Night

Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.

Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.

yellow blue

Parking Lots

If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.

But what if you have to leave your ignition key?

D If possible, park in a busy, well lit area.

D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your trunk or glove box. Be sure to close and lock the storage area.

D Close all windows.

D Lock the glove box.

D Lock all doors except the driver’s.

D Give the valet key to the valet. Then take the master key with you.

2-23

Content Theft

(If Equipped)

-

Deterrent

The vehicle may have a theft

deterrent alarm system.

A red light located on top of the instrument panel (near the center of the vehicle, in front of the windshield) will flash slowly when the system is armed.

yellow blue

While armed, the doors will not unlock with the power door lock switch. The alarm will sound if someone damages the vehicle, tampers with the trunk lock, enters the vehicle (without using the remote keyless entry transmitter or key to unlock the doors), or turns the ignition on. The horn will sound and the headlamps will flash for up to two minutes. The system will also cut off the fuel supply, preventing the vehicle from being driven.

Arming with the Power Lock Switch

Your alarm system can be programmed to arm when you use either power lock switch to lock the doors while any door is open and the key is removed from the ignition. If you would like to arm the system with the power lock switch, see “Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting

Choices” in the Index. The SECURITY light flashes quickly to let you know when the system is ready to arm with the power door lock switches. When you press the rear of the power lock switch, the SECURITY light will stop flashing and stay on to let you know the system is arming. After all doors are closed and locked, the

SECURITY light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the system is armed.

2-24

Arming with the Remote Keyless

Entry Transmitter

The alarm system will arm when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors after the key is removed from the ignition. The security light will turn on to let you know the system is arming. After all doors are closed and locked, the security light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the system is armed.

Arming Confirmation

If remote unlock confirmation is on (see “Locks and

Lighting Choices” in the Index), the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know when the alarm system has armed.

Disarming with the Remote Keyless

Entry Transmitter

The alarm system will disarm when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors. The security light will stop flashing to let you know the system is disarmed.

yellow blue

Disarming with the Key

The alarm system will disarm when you use the key to unlock the doors. The security light will stop flashing to let you know the system is disarmed. If you would like the key to disarm the alarm system, see “Locks and

Lighting Choices” in the Index.

Nuisance Alarms

If you experience nuisance alarms (alarms which are not caused by the opening of a door and are not desired), you may need to reduce the damage detection sensitivity. Try programming the Content

Theft

-

Deterrent to mode 1 (see “Locks and Lighting

Choices” in the Index). If you continue to experience nuisance alarms, you may want to try turning off damage detection by programming the Content

Theft

-

Deterrent to mode 2 (see “Locks and Lighting

Choices” in the Index).

If you are still having trouble with nuisance alarms, you can turn off the Content Theft

-

Deterrent system by programming the Content Theft

-

Deterrent to mode 3

(see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index). See the dealer or a qualified technician for service.

2-25

New Vehicle “Break

-

In”

NOTICE:

Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate

“break

in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:

D Don’t drive at any one speed

--

fast or slow

--

for the first 500 miles (805 km).

Don’t make full

throttle starts.

D Avoid making hard stops for the first

200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement.

Follow this breaking

in guideline every time you get new brake linings.

D Don’t tow a trailer during break

in.

See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for more information.

Ignition Positions

CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be injured or even killed. They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in the vehicle with children.

The ignition switch is located on the right side of the steering column. With the ignition key in the ignition switch, you can turn the switch to five positions.

yellow blue

2-26

yellow blue

RUN (D): This position is where the key returns after you start the vehicle. With the engine off, you can use RUN to display some of the warning and indicator lights.

START (E): This position starts the engine.

A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s door when the ignition is in OFF, LOCK or

ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition.

ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use things like the radio and windshield wipers when the engine is off. To use ACCESSORY, push in the key and turn it toward you. The steering wheel will stay locked.

LOCK (B): Before you put the key into the ignition switch, the switch is in LOCK. It’s also the only position from which you can remove the key. This position locks the ignition, steering wheel and transaxle. It’s a theft

deterrent feature.

OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have the vehicle pushed or towed.

NOTICE:

If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.

Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)

With Retained Accessory Power, the power windows, audio system and sunroof will continue to work up to

10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF and none of the doors are opened.

2-27

Starting Your Engine

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).

Your engine won’t start in any other position

--

that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

NOTICE:

Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

NOTICE:

If you can not remove your ignition key from the ignition and gear shift is in PARK (P) (with the shift knob button fully released, if console shift).

See “Shift Lock Release” in the Index.

Starting Your 3100 V6 Engine

1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

Holding your key in START for longer than

15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about

15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.

2. If your engine won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in

START for up to 15 seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.

2-28

NOTICE:

Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly.

If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing

Your Vehicle” in the Index.

yellow blue

Starting Your 3800 Series II V6 Engine

1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm.

NOTICE:

Holding your key in START for longer than

15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about

15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.

2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in

START for about three to five seconds at a time until your engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.

2-29

3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.

Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in

START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.

This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the normal starting procedure.

Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)

yellow blue

NOTICE:

Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly.

If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing

Your Vehicle” in the Index.

In very cold weather, 0

_F (

-

18

_C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm

up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.

2-30

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord is located below the air cleaner near the coolant reservoir bottle.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110

volt AC outlet.

yellow blue

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area.

CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three

prong

110

volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a heavy

duty three

prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

2-31

Automatic Transaxle Operation

The automatic transaxle may have a shift lever on the steering column or on the console between the seats.

Maximum engine speed is limited on automatic transaxle vehicles when you’re in PARK (P) or

NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline components from improper operation.

There are several different positions for the shift lever.

PARK (P): This locks the front wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start the engine because the vehicle can’t move easily.

yellow blue

CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.

You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).

See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

2-32

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting the engine. The vehicle has a Brake

-

Transaxle

Shift Interlock (BTSI). You must fully apply the regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK (P) while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Release the shift lever button if you have a console shift. Then move the shift lever out of

PARK (P), being sure to press the shift lever button if you have a console shift. See “Shifting Out of

PARK (P)” in the Index.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

NOTICE:

Shifting to REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transaxle.

Shift to REVERSE (R) only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging the transaxle, see “Stuck:

In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.

yellow blue

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use

NEUTRAL (N) when the vehicle is being towed.

CAUTION:

Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or

NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.

NOTICE:

Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.

2-33

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you’re:

D Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.

D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the accelerator pedal all the way down.

You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.

NOTICE:

If the vehicle seems to start up rather slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle system sensor. If you drive very far that way, the vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, have the vehicle serviced right away. Until then, you can use

SECOND (2) when you are driving less than

35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for higher speeds.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than DRIVE (D).

2-34

yellow blue

Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D):

D When driving on hilly, winding roads.

D When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears.

D When going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power, but lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use

SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use the brakes off and on.

NOTICE:

Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than

25 miles (40 km) at speeds over 55 mph

(88 km/h), or you can damage the transaxle. Use

DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3) as much as possible.

Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage the engine.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power, but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

yellow blue

Performance Shifting (If Equipped)

Press the performance shift button, located on the side of the console shift lever, to allow the transaxle to shift at higher engine speeds, increasing firmness and acceleration performance.

NOTICE:

If the front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive.

This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object.

You could damage the transaxle.

Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold the vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use the brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold the vehicle in position on a hill.

If you have a vehicle with the 3800 Supercharged engine option, the PERFORMANCE SHIFT message in the driver information center will come on.

Downshifts will occur at a lower percentage of accelerator use while you’re in the performance shift mode.

Press the button again to return to normal shifting. The transaxle will then shift at lower engine speeds, increasing fuel economy.

2-35

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with the right foot.

Push down on the parking brake pedal with the left foot.

NOTICE:

Driving with the parking brake on can cause the rear brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other parts of the vehicle.

If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, see

“Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

yellow blue

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with the right foot and push the parking brake pedal with the left foot. When you lift the left foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to the released position.

2-36

Shifting Into PARK (P)

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured.

To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a

Trailer” in the Index.

yellow blue

Column Shift

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position l ike this:

D Pull the lever toward you.

2-37

Console Shift

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:

yellow blue

D Move the lever up as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, the vehicle is in PARK (P).

D Press in and hold the shift knob button, located on the front of the shift knob.

D Push the shift knob all the way toward the front of the vehicle.

2-38

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, the vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the

Engine Running

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to.

yellow blue

If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running, be sure the vehicle is in PARK (P) and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P) position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you (or, if you have a console shift lever, without first pushing the button). If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of

PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

2-39

Shifting Out of PARK (P)

CAUTION:

Before shifting out of PARK (P) you must fully apply your regular brakes. Your vehicle can roll.

If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a

Trailer” in the Index.

Your vehicle has a Brake

-

Transaxle Shift Interlock

(BTSI). You must fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in

RUN. See “Automatic Transaxle Operation” in the Index.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK (P) while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Release the shift lever button if you have a console shift. Then move the shift lever out of PARK (P), being sure to press the shift lever button if you have a console shift.

yellow blue

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of PARK (P) with column shift, try this:

1. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.

3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the engine and shift to the drive gear you want.

5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.

For vehicles equipped with the console shift lever, see

“Shift Lock Release” in the Index.

Shift Lock Release

This vehicle is equipped with an electric Shift Lock

Release system. The shift lock release is designed to:

D Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in PARK (P) (with the shift knob button fully released if console shift), and

D prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK (P) unless the ignition is in a position other than OFF or

LOCK. The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of a dead or low voltage

(less than 9 V) battery.

If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with low voltage, there are two override access slots that will allow you to override the shift lock release.

2-40

The first is located underneath the steering column below the lock cylinder.

yellow blue

To use this slot:

1. Verify that the shift lever is in PARK (P) (with the shift knob button released if console shift).

2. Locate the override access slot below the lock cylinder.

3. Remove the override access slot cap.

4. Insert a key or screwdriver into the access slot, press in and hold.

5. Rotate the ignition key to OFF.

6. Remove the key or screwdriver from the slot.

7. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch.

8. Replace the override access slot cap.

2-41

For vehicles with center console mounted gear shift levers, the second override access slot is located on the upper right hand side of the console shift panel.

yellow blue

To use this slot:

1. Verify that the shift lever is in PARK (P) and that the shift knob button is fully released.

2. Locate the override access slot on the upper right hand side of the shift panel.

3. Remove the override access slot cap.

4. Insert a key or screwdriver into the access slot, press in and hold.

5. Press the shift knob button in and hold.

6. Remove the key or screwdriver from the slot.

7. Pull the shift lever into the desired gear position.

8. Replace the override access slot cap.

NOTE:You will not be able to remove the key from the ignition unless the shift lever is in the PARK (P) position (with the shift knob button fully released).

2-42

Parking Over Things That Burn

CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn.

yellow blue

Engine Exhaust

CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:

D Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.

D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.

D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.

D Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or over road debris.

D Repairs weren’t done correctly.

D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle:

D Drive it only with all the windows down to

blow out any CO; and

D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-43

Running Your Engine While

You’re Parked

It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.

CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under

“Engine Exhaust”).

Also, idling in a closed

in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust

--

with

CO

--

can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running.

Another closed

in place can be a blizzard.

(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.

You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.

If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

yellow blue

2-44

Power Windows

Switches on the driver’s door armrest control each of the windows when the ignition is on. In addition, each passenger door has a switch for its own window.

yellow blue

The driver’s window switch has an auto

down feature.

This switch is labeled AUTO. Tap the rear of the switch, and the driver’s window will open a small amount. If the rear of the switch is pressed all the way down and released, the window will go all the way down.

To stop the window while it is lowering, press the front of the switch. To raise the window, press and hold the front of the switch.

On four

door models, the driver’s window controls also include a lock

out switch. Push LOCK OUT to stop front and rear passengers from using their window switches. The driver can still control all the windows with the lock on. Push LOCK OUT again for normal window operation. When the orange band on the switch is showing, the passengers can operate their windows.

Full Floating Horn

The full floating horn is designed so that you may press anywhere on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn.

2-45

Tilt Wheel

A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

yellow blue

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever located on the left

hand side of the steering column below the turn signal/multifunction lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your:

D Turn and Lane Change Signals

D Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer

D Flash

to

-

Pass Feature

D Windshield Wipers

D Windshield Washer

D Cruise Control (If Equipped)

2-46

Turn and Lane Change Signals

The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.

When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically.

An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.

yellow blue

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check for burned

out bulbs and then check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).

A chime will sound if you leave the turn signal on for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km).

Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer

To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam, or high to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward you. Then release it.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.

When the high beams are on, a light on the instrument panel also will be on.

Flash-to-Pass Feature

When the headlamps are off, pull the lever toward you to momentarily switch on the high beams (to signal that you are going to pass). When you release the lever, they will turn off.

2-47

Windshield Wipers

You control the windshield wipers by turning the band marked WIPER on the turn signal/multifunction lever.

For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the band on MIST longer.

For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band to LOW.

For high

speed wiping, turn the band further, to HIGH.

To stop the wipers, turn the band to OFF.

You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The closer to LOW, the shorter the delay.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. A circuit breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Windshield Washer

At the top of the multifunction lever, there’s a paddle with the word PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will run for several sweeps and then either stop or return to your preset speed. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index.

yellow blue

CAUTION:

In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.

2-48

Cruise Control (If Equipped)

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about

25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When you apply the brakes, the cruise control shuts off.

yellow blue

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system on the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine, or the enhanced traction system on the 3100 V6 and

3800 V6 engine begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. (See “Traction

Control System” or “Enhanced Traction System” in the

Index.) When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on.

CAUTION:

D Cruise control can be dangerous where you

can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, don’t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.

D Cruise control can be dangerous on

slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.

2-49

Setting Cruise Control

CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control switch on when you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use it.

1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

Suppose you set the cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.

yellow blue

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A

(Resume/Accelerate) briefly. You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control

There are two ways to go to a higher speed:

D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.

Push in the SET button, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.

D Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release the switch. To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to R/A for less than half a second and then release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

The accelerate feature will only work after you set the cruise control speed by pushing the SET button.

2-50

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control

There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control:

D Push in the SET button until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.

D To slow down in very small amounts, push the

SET button for less than half a second. Each time you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.

When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills.

yellow blue

Ending Cruise Control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

D Step lightly on the brake pedal, or

D Move the cruise switch to OFF.

Erasing Cruise Speed Memory

When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, or shift into PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), the cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

The lamp controls are located on the lower left side of the instrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel.

They control these systems:

D Headlamps

D Taillamps

D Parking Lamps

D License Lamps

D Sidemarker Lamps

D Instrument Panel Lights

D Courtesy Lamps

D Fog Lamps

2-51

: Turn the knob to this symbol to turn on the headlamps and other operating lamps.

: Turn the knob to this symbol to turn on the parking and other operating lamps without the headlamps.

Turn the knob to OFF to turn off the lamps.

Daytime Running Lamps

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.

DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the

DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered.

The DRL system will make your low

beam headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when:

D the ignition is on,

D the headlamp switch is off and

D the parking brake is released.

When the DRL are on, only your low

beam headlamps will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either.

yellow blue

2-52

yellow blue

When it’s dark enough outside, your headlamps will change to full brightness. The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come on.

When it’s bright enough outside, the regular lamps will go out, and your low

beam headlamps change to the reduced brightness of DRL.

To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake while the ignition is in OFF or LOCK. Then start your vehicle. The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it.

Fog Lamps

The fog lamps switch is located in the upper hand corner of the instrument panel, to the left of the instrument panel cluster.

To turn the fog lamps on, press the right side of the fog lamps switch. A light will glow on the switch to let you know that they are on. (The parking lamps must be on, or the fog lamps won’t come on.) Press the left

hand side of the switch to turn the fog lamps off.

2-53

The fog lamps will go off whenever you change to high

beam headlamps. When you return to low beams, the fog lamps will come on again.

Interior Lamps

Instrument Panel Intensity Control

You can brighten or dim the instrument panel lights by turning the interior lamps dial.

Turn the dial clockwise to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and counterclockwise to decrease the brightness. Turn the control completely counterclockwise to turn them off.

yellow blue

Courtesy Lamps

When any door is opened, several lamps come on. These lamps are courtesy lamps. They make it easy for you to enter and leave the vehicle at night. You can also turn these lamps on by turning the interior lamps dial completely clockwise.

Illuminated Entry

The Illuminated Entry feature will illuminate the interior so that you can see the inside of the vehicle before you enter at night. The interior lamps will come on for

40 seconds when you unlock the doors using the remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped) and the ignition is in LOCK or OFF. After 40 seconds have elapsed, the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will fade out before 40 seconds have elapsed if you:

D Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

D Lock the doors using the power door lock switch.

When any door is opened, illuminated entry is canceled.

The interior lamps will stay on while any door is opened and slowly fade out when all doors are closed. The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds after all doors have been closed if they have not been locked.

See “Delayed Illumination” later in this section.

2-54

Delayed Illumination

The Delayed Illumination feature will continue to illuminate the interior for 25 seconds after all the doors have been closed so that you can find the ignition and buckle the seat belt at night. Delayed Illumination will not occur while the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY.

After 25 seconds have elapsed, the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will fade out before the

25 seconds have elapsed if you:

D Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

D Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).

D Lock the doors using the power door lock switch.

To turn Delayed Illumination feature off or on, see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.

yellow blue

Exit Lighting

For exiting the vehicle at night, the vehicle is equipped with the Exit Lighting feature. The interior lamps will illuminate for up to 25 seconds when you remove the key from the ignition. After 25 seconds have elapsed, the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds have elapsed if you:

D Insert the key and turn the ignition to RUN or

ACCESSORY.

D Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).

D Lock the doors using the power door lock switch.

When any door is opened, Exit Lighting is canceled. The interior lamps will stay on while any door is opened and will slowly fade out when all the doors are closed. The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds after all the doors have been closed if they have not been locked.

See “Delayed Illumination” earlier in this section.

To turn the Exit Lighting feature off or on, see “Locks and Lighting Choices” in the Index.

2-55

Front Reading Lamps

If the vehicle has the optional sunroof, you will have reading lamps in front of the sunroof switch. Press the button behind each reading lamp to turn them on and off.

Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps

There is a reading lamp provided in each rear assist handle. Use the button next to each lamp to turn it on and off.

Roof Console Reading Lamps

These lamps are part of the roof console. They will go on when you open the doors. When the doors are closed, push the button next to each lamp to turn them on and off. The console also contains an open storage bin.

yellow blue

Battery Saver

The vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from draining the battery in case you accidentally leave the interior, trunk or underhood lamps on. If you leave any of these lamps on while the ignition is in LOCK or OFF, they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes. The lamps won’t come back on again until you do one of the following:

D Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

D Turn the interior lamp dial completely clockwise, then back slightly counterclockwise.

D Open (or close and reopen) a door that is closed.

If the vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on the odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps after only three minutes.

2-56

Mirrors

Adjust all the mirrors so you can see clearly when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position.

Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror

To reduce glare from lamps behind you, pull the lever toward you (to the night position). To return the mirror back to the day position, push the lever away from you.

yellow blue

Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirror

(If Equipped)

The vehicle may have an electrochromic day/night rearview mirror. Push the button on the bottom of the mirror to turn this feature on. The mirror will darken gradually to reduce glare from headlamps behind you.

This may take a few moments.

2-57

One photocell on the front of the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside. Another photocell, facing rearward, senses headlamps behind you. To turn the electrochromic feature off, press the button on the bottom of the mirror again.

To keep the photocells operating well, occasionally clean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner.

Power Outside Mirrors

The power mirror control is near the driver’s window, on the armrest. Turn the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror or clockwise to adjust the right mirror. Then move the control in the direction you want to move the mirror.

Convex Outside Mirror

Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat.

yellow blue

CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are.

If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

2-58

Storage Compartments

Glove Box

Use the master key to lock and unlock the glove box. To open, lift the right side of the latch.

Overhead Console (Option)

yellow blue

Reading Lamps

To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the switch next to it.

Garage Door Opener

You can store your garage door opener in the rear compartment of the overhead console, and operate it from this position. To install your garage door opener, follow these instructions:

1. Open the compartment by pressing the latch forward.

Remove the piece of self

sticking Velcro

R

.

2. Peel the protective backing from the Velcro and press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener.

3. Be sure that the button on your garage door opener is centered above the area with raised lines on the compartment door. Make sure the button is facing down and press the opener firmly into place.

The optional overhead console has reading lamps, storage compartments (including one for your garage door opener and one for sunglasses) and an accessory power outlet. These features are explained on the following pages.

2-59

4. Once the opener is installed, remove the peg (B) from the compartment. Install the peg onto the feature (A) on the door that is aligned with your garage door opener button.

5. Add one peg at a time until your garage door opener operates with the compartment door closed when you press the button.

yellow blue

Sunglasses Storage Compartment

The sunglasses storage compartment is the second compartment from the back on the overhead console. To open the sunglasses storage compartment, press the release latch forward and pull the compartment down to the full open position.

Accessory Power Outlet

The accessory power outlet is located in front of the reading lamps in a small, black door. Push up on the bottom edge of this door to expose the accessory power outlet and a small storage compartment.

2-60

Center Console Storage (If Equipped)

yellow blue

Rear Armrest Storage (If Equipped)

If you have a trunk access panel, you will also have a pull down armrest that contains an open storage bin and two cupholders.

Trunk Access Panel (If Equipped)

To open the armrest storage area, pull up on the front edge of the latch. The console has cassette and CD storage and a coinholder.

The center console also contains two cupholders. To access the cupholders, pull the cupholder door, located just behind the console shift lever. The two cupholders will pop up into an upright position.

Just below the center ashtray is an open storage compartment. In front of this, you may have a smaller compartment for storing smaller items.

If the vehicle has rear seat armrests, you will also have a trunk access panel. To use the trunk access panel, pull the rear armrest down, unlock the access panel and pull it down.

2-61

Convenience Net (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll see it on the back wall of the trunk.

Put small loads, like grocery bags, in the net. It can help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops.

The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store them in the trunk as far forward as you can.

You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you’re not using it.

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter

The center front ashtray is on the instrument panel. To open it, pull at the bottom of the ashtray until it is fully open. To remove the ashtray cup, lift the tabs on the sides and pull out.

The vehicle has one rear ashtray. There is either one on the front seat armrest back or one on the back of the center console (if you have that option). To open the ashtray, press the right side and turn it open.

To remove the ashtray for cleaning, press the snuffer as you lift up the bottom of the ashtray.

yellow blue

2-62

NOTICE:

Don’t put papers and other things that burn into the ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire, causing damage.

To use the lighter, located inside the center front ashtray, just push it in all the way and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself.

yellow blue

Sun Visors

To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You can also swing them from front to side.

Visor Vanity Mirrors

Open the cover to expose the vanity mirror. If the vehicle has the optional lighted vanity mirrors, the lamps come on when you open the cover.

NOTICE:

Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to back away from the heating element when it’s ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and the heating element.

2-63

OnStar

R

System (Option)

OnStar

R

is a vehicle communications service which may be ordered through your dealer. The following

OnStar

R

services are available 24 hours a day:

D Roadside Service with Location

D Emergency Services Button

D Remote Door Unlock

D Theft Vehicle Tracking

D Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment

D Concierge/Customer Conveniences Services

For more information, contact the dealer.

Accessory Power Outlet

(If Equipped)

If the vehicle has a center console or the optional overhead console, you have a 12

volt outlet. On the center console it is located on the passenger’s side, near the floor and on the overhead console It is located in front of the reading lamps in a small, black door.

Remove the tethered cap to use the outlet.

NOTICE:

Adding electrical equipment to the vehicle can damage it or keep other things from working as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by the warranty. Check with the dealer before adding electrical equipment and never use anything requiring more than 20 amps.

Purse or Litter Bag Holder

On the front of the center console, to the right of the accessory power outlet (on the passenger’s side of the vehicle), there is a hook that can be used to hold a purse or litter bag.

yellow blue

2-64

Sunroof (If Equipped)

The sunroof includes a sliding glass panel and a two

piece sunshade. The switch works only when the ignition or RAP is on. See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.

yellow blue

Push the rear of the switch once and the sunroof will open to the vent position only. You will need to open the sunshade by hand.

Push the rear of the switch a second time and the sunroof will open the remainder of the way by itself.

This is the express

open feature.

To close the sunroof, push and hold the front of the switch until the sunroof closes. The sunshade can only be closed by hand.

2-65

The Instrument Panel

--

Your Information System

yellow blue

2-66

The main components of the instrument panel are:

A. Side Window Defogger Vents

B. Fog Lamp Switch

C. Multifunction Lever

D. Instrument Panel Cluster

E. Emergency Flasher Button

F. Full Floating Horn

G. Column Shift Lever (If Equipped)

H. Trip Computer/Driver Information Center (DIC)

I. Instrument Panel Vents

J. Interior Lamp Control

K. Exterior Lamp Control

L. Tilt Wheel Control

M. Audio Steering Controls (If Equipped)

N. HUD Display Controls (If Equipped)

O. Comfort Controls

P. Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter

Q. Audio System

R. Glove Box

S. Instrument Panel Fuse Block

yellow blue

2-67

Instrument Panel Cluster

United States Version Shown, Others Similar

The instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, about how much fuel is in the tank and many other things you need to drive safely and economically.

2-68

yellow blue

yellow blue

Speedometer/Odometer

The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven in either miles (used in the United States) or in kilometers

(used in Canada).

The vehicle has a tamper

resistant odometer. If you see silver lines between the numbers, you’ll know someone has probably tampered with it and the numbers may not be correct.

You may wonder what happens if the vehicle needs a new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then that will be done.

If it can’t, then it will be set at zero and a label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed.

Trip Odometer

The trip odometer tells how far you have driven since you last reset it. To set it to zero, press the RESET button on the right side of the instrument cluster.

Tachometer

The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

NOTICE:

Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area, or engine damage may occur.

2-69

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators

This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle.

yellow blue

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.

Waiting to do repairs can be costly

--

and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.

Your vehicle may also have a driver information system that works along with the warning lights and gages.

See “Driver Information System” in the Index.

Safety Belt Reminder Light

When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 70 seconds, or until the driver’s seatbelt is buckled.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on.

2-70

Air Bag Readiness Light

There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows SRS AIR BAG. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.

This light will come on when you start your engine, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready.

Charging System Light

yellow blue

The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition, as a check to show you it’s working. Then it will go out.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with the charging system. It could indicate that you have a loose drive belt or another electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.

The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-71

yellow blue

Brake System Warning Light

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.

Have your brake system inspected right away.

This light should come on when you turn the key to

START. If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.

CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.

It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.)

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem.

2-72

Traction Control System Warning Light

(3800 Supercharged V6 Engine Only)

yellow blue

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light

With the anti

lock brake system, this light will come on when you start your engine and it will stay on for three seconds.

That’s normal.

If the anti

lock brake system warning light stays on longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs service. If the light is on and the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti

lock brakes. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The anti

lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

The traction control system warning light may come on for the following reasons:

D If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS button located on the far right hand side of the Driver

Information Center, the warning light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the button again. The warning light should go off. (See “Traction

Control System” in the Index for more information.)

D If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically related to traction control, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on. If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on until your brakes cool down.

If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

2-73

Enhanced Traction System Warning Light

(3100 V6 or 3800 V6 Engine)

When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

Low Traction Light

If you have the Enhanced

Traction System or the

Traction Control System, this light will also come on when the system is limiting wheel spin.

yellow blue

The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come on for the following reasons:

D If you turn the system off by pressing the TRAC button on the far right hand side of the driver information center or trip computer (if equipped), the warning light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the button again. The warning light should go off. See “Enhanced Traction System” in the Index for more information.

D If the Enhanced Traction System warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service. Adjust your driving accordingly.

D If the traction control system is affected by an engine

related problem, the system will turn off and the warning light will come on.

2-74

You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. Slippery road conditions may exist if the low traction light comes on, so adjust your driving accordingly. The light will stay on for a few seconds after the anti

lock system stops adjusting brake pressure or the Enhanced Traction System or the Traction

Control System stops limiting wheel spin. See

“Enhanced Traction System” or “Traction Control

System” in the Index.

The low traction light also comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be there to tell you when the Traction Control System or Enhanced Traction

System is active.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(Service Engine Soon Light)

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly.

This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty.

This system is called OBD II (On

-

Board

Diagnostics

-

Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

NOTICE:

Modifications made to the engine, transaxle, exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria

(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.

2-75

This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.

This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

D Light Flashing

--

A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.

D Light On Steady

--

An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.

Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.

yellow blue

If the Light Is Flashing

The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle:

D Reducing vehicle speed.

D Avoiding hard accelerations.

D Avoiding steep uphill grades.

D If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,

stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.

Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light

Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service.

2-76

If the Light Is On Steady

You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Are you low on fuel?

As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. See

“Filling Your Tank” in the Index. It will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.

yellow blue

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see

“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start

up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)

This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed.

2-77

Oil Warning Light

If you have a problem with your oil pressure, this light may stay on after you start your engine, or come on when you are driving.

CAUTION:

Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned.

Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced.

This indicates that oil is not going through your engine quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The engine could be low on oil or could have some other oil problem.

Have it fixed right away.

The oil light could also come on in two other situations:

D When the ignition is on but the engine is not running, the light will come on as a test to show you it is working, but the light will go out when you turn the ignition to START. If it doesn’t come on with the ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.

D If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for a moment. This is normal.

NOTICE:

Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty.

yellow blue

2-78

Low Oil Level Light

The engine is equipped with an oil level monitoring system. When the ignition key is turned to ON, the

LOW OIL LEVEL light will briefly flash.

yellow blue

Engine Coolant Temperature Light

This light tells you that the engine coolant has overheated or the radiator cooling fan is not working.

If the light does not flash, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.

If the light stays on, stop the vehicle on a level surface and turn the engine off. Check the oil level using the engine oil dipstick. (See “Engine Oil” in the Index.)

The oil level monitoring system only checks oil level during the brief period when the ignition key is between

RUN and START. It does not monitor engine oil level when the engine is running. Additionally, an oil level check is only performed if the engine has been turned off for a considerable period of time, allowing the oil normally in circulation to drain back into the oil pan.

If you have been operating the vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

2-79

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

You have a gage that shows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves into the red area, the engine is too hot!

Low Coolant Warning Light

If this light comes on, the system is low on coolant and the engine may overheat.

yellow blue

That reading means the same thing as the warning light.

It means that the engine coolant has overheated. If you have been operating the vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

See “Engine Coolant” in the Index and have the vehicle serviced as soon as you can.

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left when the ignition is on. When the indicator nears E (EMPTY), you still have a little fuel left, but you should get more soon.

2-80

yellow blue

Here are four things that some owners ask about. All these things are normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:

D At the gas station, the pump shuts off before the gage reads F (FULL).

D It takes a more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but it took a more (or less) than half the tank’s capacity to fill it.

D The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking or speeding up.

D The gage may not indicate E (EMPTY) when the ignition is turned off.

Low Fuel Light

If your fuel is low, the warning light near the fuel gage will go on.

It will also come on for a few seconds when you first turn on the ignition as a check to show you it’s working.

If it doesn’t come on then, see your dealer.

2-81

Head

-

Up Display (Option)

CAUTION:

If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in your field of view, it may take you more time to see things you need to see when it’s dark outside.

Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed low in your field of view.

If you have the Head

-

Up

Display (HUD), you can see the speedometer reading (in

English or metric units) and a brief display of the current radio station or CD track, displayed “through” the windshield.

The HUD also shows these lights when they are lit on the instrument panel:

D Turn Signal Indicators

D High

-

Beam Indicator Symbol

D Low Fuel Symbol

The HUD will display “CHECK GAGE” when the following items are lit on the instrument panel:

D Oil Warning Symbol

D Coolant Temperature Symbol

D Charging System Symbol

When you sit straight in your seat, the HUD image will appear straight ahead near the front bumper.

yellow blue

2-82

To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly:

yellow blue

When the ignition key is turned to RUN, the HUD image will come on. Then the Head

-

Up Display will operate normally.

NOTICE:

Although the HUD image appears yo be near the front of the vehicle, do not use it as a parking aid.

The HUD was not designed for that purpose. If you try to use it that way, such as in a parking lot, you may misjudge distance and run into something.

When the HUD is on, the speedometer reading will be displayed continually. The current radio station or CD track number will only be displayed for three seconds after the radio or CD track status changes. This will happen whenever one of the radio controls is pressed, either on the radio itself or on the optional steering wheel controls.

1. Start your engine and turn the DIM dial to the desired HUD image brightness.

2. Adjust your seat, if necessary, to a comfortable position.

3. Press the top of the UP/DN switch until the HUD image stops moving. Then press the bottom of the switch until the image is as low as possible but in full view.

2-83

4. Turn the DIM dial down until the HUD image is no brighter than necessary. To turn the HUD off, turn the DIM dial all the way down.

If the sun comes out, it becomes cloudy, or if you turn on your headlamps, you may need to adjust the HUD brightness again. Polarized sunglasses could make the

HUD image harder to see.

Push the ENG/MET button on the trip calculator to switch the HUD display from English to metric or metric to English. If your vehicle is not equipped with the trip calculator, you can’t change the display.

Care of the Head-Up Display

Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity of the HUD image.

To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry it.

Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the cleaner could leak into the unit.

yellow blue

2-84

If You Can’t See the HUD Image When the Ignition Is On

D Is anything covering the HUD unit?

D Is the HUD dimmer setting bright enough?

D Is the HUD image adjusted to the proper height?

D Still no HUD image? Check the fuse in the instrument panel fuse block. See “Fuses and Circuit

Breakers” in the Index.

If the HUD Image Is Not Clear

D Is the HUD image too bright?

D Are the windshield and HUD lens clean?

The windshield is part of the HUD system. If you ever have to have a new windshield, be sure to get one designed for HUD. If you don’t, the HUD image may look blurred and out of focus.

yellow blue

Power Drop Feature

The vehicle is equipped with auxiliary power leads.

These leads can be used to power aftermarket electrical equipment added to the vehicle. They are located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle, below the glove box. For additional information on accessing these leads and electrical hookup, please refer to the service manual.

2-85

Driver Information Center (DIC) (If Equipped)

yellow blue

The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you important safety and maintenance facts. When you turn the ignition on, all of the Driver Information Center lights light up for a few seconds. Then it goes to work.

2-86

yellow blue

Functions

: If one of the doors is ajar, a light will appear next to that door on the vehicle outline.

CHANGE OIL SOON: This light will appear when the system predicts that the oil’s remaining useful life is almost up. The system predicts remaining oil life using inputs from length of drives, coolant temperature, engine rpm and vehicle speed. It alerts you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with the vehicle’s driving conditions.

After changing the oil, the system must be reset. With the ignition key in ON but the engine off, fully push and release the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds. If the CHANGE OIL SOON light flashes, the system is resetting. Turn the ignition key to OFF, then start the vehicle. If the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes back on, the Oil Life Monitor has not reset.

Repeat the procedure.

LOW: This light will come on when the ignition is on and the fluid container is low.

AJAR: This light alerts you that the trunk is not fully closed.

LOW TRAC: This light will come on when the

Traction Control System is limiting wheel spin. See

“Trac System” or “Low Traction Light” in the Index.

TRAC OFF: This light lets you know that the Traction

Control System has been disabled and will not limit wheel spin. See “Enhanced Traction System Warning

Light” or “Low Traction Light” in the Index.

TRAC switch: If the vehicle has the Traction Control

System, you will have a disable switch on the far right side of the Driver Information Center. The Traction

Control System is automatically activated when you turn the ignition on. This switch will activate/deactivate the

Traction Control System. If you need to disable the system, such as when you are stuck and are rocking the vehicle back and forth, push this switch. See “Stuck: In

Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.

2-87

Trip Computer (If Equipped)

3100 and 3800 Engines

When you start the engine, the trip computer will display a mode. A lighted oval will appear to the left of the mode currently being used.

2-88

yellow blue

yellow blue

3800 Supercharged Engine

When you start the engine, the trip computer will display a mode. A lighted oval will appear to the left of the mode currently being used.

2-89

Control Buttons

The trip computer has three buttons that control its functions.

ENG/MET: Press this button to change the display from

English to metric units or metric to English.

RESET: Press this button for two seconds to reset the mode displayed.

MODE: Press this button to change the mode being displayed.

Functions

PERFORMANCE SHIFT: This light comes on when you press the performance shift button (located on the console shift) to indicate that the vehicle is in performance shifting mode.

See “Performance Shifting” in the Index.

FUEL USED: Shows the total amount of fuel used since you last reset this mode. The amount can be displayed in gallons or liters.

yellow blue

AVG ECON: Shows the average fuel economy since you last reset this mode.

OIL LIFE: Shows a percentage of the oil’s remaining useful life. The system predicts remaining oil life using inputs from length of drives, coolant temperature, engine rpm and vehicle speed. Each time you get an oil change, be sure to reset this function so that it will give you an accurate percentage. See “How to Reset the Oil

Life Monitor” in the Index.

RANGE: Shows how much farther you can travel with the fuel you have before refueling. When the range displays L, for 40 to 50 miles (64.36 to 80.45 km), the display will flash the word LOW continuously and the vehicle will chime three times. The range is calculated from the average econ value times the fuel remaining in the tank.

LOW: This light will come on when the ignition is on and the fluid container is low.

2-90

DOOR AJAR: If one of the doors is left ajar, a light will appear next to that door on the vehicle outline.

BOOST GAGE: If you have the 3800 supercharged engine, this gage will show the amount of boost the engine is receiving.

TRUNK AJAR: If the trunk is not fully closed or open, a light will outline the trunk area on the vehicle outline.

LOW TRAC: This light will come on when the

Traction Control System is limiting wheel spin. See

“Traction Control System” or “Low Traction Light” in the Index.

yellow blue

TRAC/TCS OFF: This light lets you know that the

Traction Control System has been disabled and will not limit wheel spin. See “Traction Control System Warning

Light” or “Low Traction Light” in the Index.

TRAC/TCS SWITCH: If the vehicle has the Traction

Control System, you will have a disable switch on the far right side of the Trip Computer. The Traction

Control System is automatically activated when you turn the ignition on. This switch will activate/deactivate the

Traction Control System. If you need to disable the system, such as when you are stuck and are rocking the vehicle back and forth, push this switch. See “Stuck: In

Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.

2-91

NOTES

2-92

yellow blue

yellow blue

Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.

3

-

2

3

-

2

3

-

4

Comfort Controls

Air Conditioning with Electronic Controls

Air Conditioning with Automatic and

Auxiliary Temperature Control (If Equipped)

3

-

8

3

-

9

Rear Window Defogger

Ventilation System

3

-

10

Audio Systems

3

-

10

Setting the Clock

3

-

10

AM

-

FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player

3

-

14

AM

-

FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player

(If Equipped)

3

-

16

AM

-

FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and

Equalizer (If Equipped)

3

-

19

Trunk

-

Mounted CD Changer (Option)

3

-

22

Theft

-

Deterrent Feature

3

-

25

Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)

3

-

26

Understanding Radio Reception

3

-

26

Tips About Your Audio System

3

-

27

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

3

-

28

Care of Your Compact Discs

3

-

28

Care of Your Compact Disc Player

3

-

28

Fixed Mast Antenna

3

-

29

Backglass Antenna (If Equipped)

3-

3-1

Comfort Controls

Air Conditioning with Electronic Controls

With this system, you can control the heating, cooling and ventilation in your vehicle. The system works best if you keep your windows closed while using it.

Fan Knob

The left knob selects the amount of air you want. To turn the fan off, turn the knob to OFF. The fan must be on to run the air conditioning compressor.

yellow blue

Temperature Knob

The center knob changes the temperature of the air coming through the system. Turn this knob toward red

(clockwise) for warmer air. Turn it toward blue

(counterclockwise) for cooler air.

Mode Knob

The right knob has several settings to control the direction of airflow:

MAX: This setting recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle and sends it through the instrument panel outlets. The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is below 38

_F (3.3_C). (Even when the compressor is running, you can control the temperature.)

UPPER: This setting brings in outside air and directs it through the instrument panel outlets.

BI

-

LEVEL: This setting brings in outside air and directs it two ways. Half of the air is directed through the instrument panel outlets. Most of the remaining air is directed through the floor ducts and a little to the defrost and side window vents.

3-2

FLOOR: This setting sends most of the air through the ducts near the floor. The remaining airflow comes out of the defroster and side window vents.

DEFOG: This setting allows half of the air to go to the floor ducts and half to the defroster and side window vents.

DEFROST: This setting directs most of the air through the defroster. Some of the air goes to the floor ducts and the side window vent. The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is below 38

_F (3.3_C).

Air Conditioning Compressor Button

Press the A/C button to operate the air conditioning compressor. The indicator light above the button will glow when the button is pressed. You don’t have to press the button to run the compressor in MAX or

DEFROST because it will already be running in these modes.

yellow blue

Air Conditioning

On very hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot, inside air escape. This reduces the time for the vehicle to cool down.

For quick cool

down on very hot days, use MAX with the temperature knob all the way in the blue area. If this setting is used for long periods of time, the air in your vehicle may become too dry.

For normal cooling on hot days, use UPPER with the temperature knob in the blue area and the A/C button pushed in. The system will bring in outside air and cool it.

On cool, but sunny days, the sun may warm your upper body, but your lower body may not be warm enough.

You can use BI

-

LEVEL with the temperature knob in the middle and the A/C button pushed in. The system will bring in outside air and direct it to your upper body, while sending slightly warmed air to your lower body.

You may notice this temperature difference more at some times than others.

3-3

yellow blue

Heating

On cold days use FLOOR with the temperature knob all the way in the red area. The system will bring in outside air, heat it and send it to the floor ducts.

If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater, you can use it to help your system provide warm air faster when it’s cold outside 0

_F (

-

18

_C) or lower. An engine coolant heater warms the coolant your engine and heating system use to provide heat. See “Engine Coolant

Heater” in the Index.

Ventilation

For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed, use UPPER, with the A/C button off, to direct outside air through your vehicle. Your vehicle also has the flow

through ventilation system described later in this section.

Defogging and Defrosting

Your system has two settings for clearing the front and side windows. To defrost the windows quickly, use

DEFROST with the temperature knob all the way in the red area. To warm passengers while keeping the windows clean, use DEFOG.

Air Conditioning with Automatic and

Auxiliary Temperature Control

(If Equipped)

With this system, you set a “desired cabin” temperature.

You can then either let the system automatically control airflow direction and amount (to maintain the desired cabin temperature) or you can manually adjust it. The system works best if you keep your windows closed while using it.

3-4

Automatic Control

For the most efficient operation, you should set the system temperature and press AUTO. The system will select the best fan speed and airflow settings to keep you comfortable. The air conditioning compressor will run if the outside temperature is above 38

_F (3.3_C). You may notice a delay of three to four minutes before the fan comes on.

Driver’s Temperature Knob

The left knob sets the temperature for the entire system when the light on DUAL button isn’t lit. If the light is lit, the knob sets the temperature for the driver. Turn the knob toward red (clockwise) to raise the desired cabin temperature. Turn it toward blue (counterclockwise) to lower the temperature. The display will show your selection for a few seconds, then the outside temperature will show or be displayed.

Passenger’s Temperature Knob

The right knob sets the desired cabin temperature for the passenger and will automatically force the system into a dual zone operation, lighting the dual zone button light.

Turn the right knob toward red (clockwise) to raise the temperature. Turn it toward blue (counterclockwise) to lower the temperature.

yellow blue

Dual Zone Button Light

The dual zone button light indicates whether the system is in single zone or dual zone operation. When there is no desire for dual zone operation, push the lit dual zone button to return to single zone operation. The dual zone button light will go off.

The system will operate to achieve your comfort set point as quick as possible. If you set the temperature for

60

_F (16_C) or 90_F (32_C), the fan will go to its highest speed, unless you manually select a lower speed.

The system will maintain full cold or full hot operation at these settings.

Cold Weather Example: When you start the vehicle in cold weather, (below freezing) or after being parked overnight. If your Driver Set Temperature is 73

_F

(23

_C) and you are in Full Automatic mode, the system will automatically move the temperature doors to full hot. The blower will start out at a low speed and the blower speed will increase as the engine warms up. The air will be delivered to the floor. As the interior of the vehicle warms up to your desired comfort point, the blower will decrease and the temperature door will move to a cooler position to maintain your desired comfort. As the cabin warms up or the sun load increases the system could switch to air delivered to the individual to the windshield and the floor (Defog mode).

3-5

Hot Weather Example: When you start the vehicle in hot weather, 80

_F (27_C) or after being parked during the day in full sun, if your Driver Set Temperature is

73

_F (23_C) and you are in Full Automatic mode, the system will automatically move the temperature doors to full cold. The blower will be at low speed momentarily and then go to the high speed. The air intake will be recirculated for maximum cooling performance. As the interior of the vehicle cools down to your desired comfort point, the blower will decrease and the temperature door will move to a warmer position to maintain your desired comfort. As the cabin cools down or the sun load decreases the system could switch to air delivered to A/C vents and the floor (Bi

level mode).

Manual Control

Fan Buttons

The fan buttons select the amount of air you want when the system is not in AUTO. The display will show the fan speed by illuminating a maximum of seven fan bars.

yellow blue

Mode Button

The center panel has several settings to control the direction of airflow when the system is not in AUTO.

The indicator light on the button will glow when the button is pressed. To access the various modes available, continue to press the MODE button until the desired mode appears on the display.

If you prefer to manually control the heating, cooling and ventilation in your vehicle, push UPPER, BI

-

LEV,

LOWER, DEFOG or DEF. AUTO will go off the display. Set the system to the temperature and fan speed you want. The system will try to maintain the temperature you set using the mode you select. The following suggestions will help the system run more efficiently in manual mode.

RECIRC: This setting recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle and sends it through the instrument panel outlets. The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is below 38

_F (3.3_C).

UPPER: This setting brings in the outside air and directs it through the instrument panel outlets.

3-6

BI

-

LEV: This setting brings in the outside air and directs it two ways. Half of the air is directed through the instrument panel outlets. Most of the remaining air is directed through the floor ducts and a little to the defrost and side window vents.

LOWER: This setting sends most of the air through the ducts near the floor. The remaining airflow comes out of the defroster and side window vents.

DEFOG: This setting allows half of the air to go to the floor ducts and half to the defroster and side window vents.

DEF: This setting directs most of the air through the defrost vent. Some of the air goes to the floor ducts and the side window vents. The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is below 38

_F (3.3_C).

yellow blue

Air Conditioning

On very hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot, inside air escape. This reduces the time for the vehicle to cool down.

For quick cool

down on very hot days, use RECIRC.

If this setting is used for long periods of time, the air in your vehicle may become too dry.

For normal cooling on hot days, use UPPER with the

A/C button pushed in. The system will bring in outside air and cool it.

On cool, but sunny days, the sun may warm your upper body, but your lower body may not be warm enough.

You can use BI

-

LEV with the A/C button pushed in.

The system will bring in outside air and direct it to your upper body, while sending slightly warmed air to your lower body. You may notice this temperature difference more at some times than others.

3-7

Heating

On cold days use LOWER. The system will bring in outside air, heat it and send it to the floor ducts.

If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater, you can use it to help your system provide warm air faster when it’s cold outside 0

_F (

-

18

_C) or lower. An engine coolant heater warms the coolant your engine and heating system uses to provide heat. See “Engine Coolant

Heater” in the Index.

Ventilation

For mild, outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed, use UPPER with the A/C button off, to direct outside air through your vehicle. Your vehicle also has the flow

through ventilation system described later in this section.

Defogging and Defrosting

Your system has two settings for clearing the front and side windows. To defrost the windows quickly, use DEF.

To warm passengers while keeping the windows clean, use DEFOG.

Rear Window Defogger

Your comfort control system has a button to operate your rear window defogger. The electronic comfort control system has a button marked REAR. The system with automatic temperature control has a button marked R.DEF.

yellow blue

3-8

yellow blue

The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window. Press the button to turn the rear defogger on. It will turn itself off after about ten minutes.

If you turn it on again, the rear defogger will only run for about five minutes before turning off. You can also turn it off by pressing the button again.

Do not attach anything like a temporary vehicle license or decal across the defogger grid.

NOTICE:

Don’t use a razor blade or anything else sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

Ventilation System

Adjust the direction of airflow by moving the louvered vents.

Your vehicle’s flow

through ventilation system supplies outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the air conditioning fan is running.

Ventilation Tips

D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or any other obstruction, such as leaves. The heater and defroster will work far better, reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

3-9

D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, adjust the mode knob to FLOOR and the fan to the highest speed for a few seconds before driving off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle.

Audio Systems

Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure.

You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco

Electronics system can do and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

Setting the Clock

Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute appears. There will be a two

second delay before the clock goes into time

set mode, and the colon on the display will blink while in this mode.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player

Playing the Radio

POWER

-

VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.

Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press this knob to recall the station frequency.

yellow blue

3-10

Finding a Station

AM

-

FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it.

SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to

18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM

-

FM to select the band.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until

SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

yellow blue

Setting the Tone

BASS: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease bass.

TREBLE: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends.

Turn this knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends.

Turn this knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.

3-11

Playing a Cassette Tape

Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE, BAL,

BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio.

The display will show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing. When the down indicator arrow is lit, selections listed on the bottom side of the cassette are playing. When the up arrow is lit, selections listed on the top side of the cassette are playing. The tape player automatically begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of the tape.

If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape won’t play because of an error.

D E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly.

D E11: The tape is broken. Try a new tape.

D E14: Wrapped tape. Try a new tape.

3-12

yellow blue

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to search for the previous selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation. Press

PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop searching. The sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation.

NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to search for the next selection on the tape. If you hold the button, the player will continue moving forward through the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT or SEEK to work. The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or

SEEK operation. Press NEXT or the SEEK up arrow to stop searching. The sound will mute during NEXT or

SEEK operation.

PROG (3): Press this button to play the other side of the tape.

D (4): Press this button to reduce background noise.

Note that the double

-

D symbol will appear on the display.

Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double

-

D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

REV (5): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.

Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected station while the tape reverses. You may select stations during REV operation by using

SEEK or TUNE.

FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape. Press the button again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected station while the tape advances. You may select stations during FWD operation by using SEEK or TUNE.

AM

-

FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape is in the player.

TAPE/PLAY: Press this button to change to the tape function when the radio is on. The tape symbol with an arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active.

To return to playing the radio, press the AM

-

FM button.

yellow blue

EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first.

CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of

Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display

---

to show the indicator was reset.

CD Adapter Kits

It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player.

To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the TAPE/PLAY button for three seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.

4. Insert the adapter. It will power up the radio and begin playing.

This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed.

3-13

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player

(If Equipped)

Playing the Radio

POWER

-

VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.

Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this knob to recall the station frequency.

yellow blue

Finding a Station

AM/FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it.

SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to

18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM

-

FM to select the band.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until

SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-14

Setting the Tone

BASS: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease bass.

TREBLE: Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.

Playing a Compact Disc

Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. The compact disc symbol will appear on the display. If the ignition and the radio are on, the disc will begin playing. CD will appear on the display next to the compact disc symbol. If you want to insert a disc when the ignition is off, first press EJECT.

yellow blue

The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm

“single” discs. Full

size compact discs and the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner.

If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot, the disc may not play and E (error) and a number may appear on the radio display. If the disc comes out, it could be that:

D The disc is upside down.

D It is dirty, scratched or wet.

D The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.)

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc.

NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to go to the start of the next track. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the disc.

3-15

RDM (3): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. The display will show

RDM. Press RDM again to turn off random play.

REV (5): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show elapsed time.

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.

The display will show elapsed time.

RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing.

When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed.

AM/FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc is playing. The disc will stop but remain in the player.

CD/PLAY: Press this button to change to the disc function when the radio is on.

EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc or stop the disc and switch to the radio. EJECT will work with the radio off.

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Equalizer (If Equipped)

Playing the Radio

POWER

-

VOL: Push this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.

Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.

RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station being played or to display the clock. If you press the knob when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a few seconds.

yellow blue

3-16

Finding a Station

AM/FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it.

SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to

18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM

-

FM to select the band.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until

SET appears on the display. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone

EQUALIZER: A seven

band equalizer is part of your audio system. Slide the levers up to boost or down to reduce frequency range.

yellow blue

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.

Playing a Compact Disc

Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on, the disc will begin playing. If you want to insert a disc when the ignition is off, first press EJECT.

If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot, the disc may not play and E (error) and a number may appear on the radio display. If the disc comes out, it could be that:

D The disc is upside down.

D It is dirty, scratched or wet.

D The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.)

3-17

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc.

NEXT (2): Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to go to the start of the next track. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the disc.

RDM (3): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. The display will show

RDM. Press RDM again to turn off random play.

REV (5): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show elapsed time.

yellow blue

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.

The display will show elapsed time.

RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing.

When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed.

AM/FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc is playing. The disc will stop but remain in the player.

CD/PLAY: Press this button to change to the disc function when the radio is on.

EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc or stop the disc and switch to the radio. EJECT will work with the radio off.

3-18

Trunk-Mounted CD Changer (Option)

With the optional compact disc changer, you can play up to 12 discs continuously. Normal size discs may be played using the trays supplied in the magazine.

The small discs (8 cm) can be played only with specially designed trays.

yellow blue

If you load a disc label side up, the disc will not play and an error will occur. Gently push the tray back into the magazine slot. Repeat this procedure for loading up to 12 discs in the magazine.

You must first load the magazine with discs before you can play a compact disc. Each of the 12 trays holds one disc. Press the button on the back of the magazine and pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays from bottom to top, placing a disc on the tray label side down.

Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on top of the magazine.

3-19

Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left. If the door is left partially open, the changer will not operate and an error will occur. When the door is closed, the changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine.

This will continue for up to two minutes depending on the number of discs loaded.

To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD changer door all the way open. The magazine will automatically eject. Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer.

yellow blue

All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for ejecting the magazine. Whenever a

CD magazine with discs is loaded in the changer, the compact disc symbol will appear on the radio display. If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs, the compact disc symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play. When a CD begins playing, CD will appear in the bottom left corner and a disc and track number will be displayed. The disc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine.

Compact Disc Errors

If E and a number appear on the display, an error has occurred and the compact disc temporarily cannot play.

The CD changer will send an error message to the receiver to indicate:

D E30: Disc Label Side Up

D E34: CD Changer Door Open

3-20

If the error occurred while trying to play a CD in the compact disc player or changer, the following conditions may have caused the error:

D The road is too rough. The disc should play when the road is smoother.

D The disc is dirty, scratched or wet.

D The disc is label side up. If so, load the disc label side down.

D The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again.

D The CD changer door is open. Completely close the door to restore normal operation.

D An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer.

Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of the trays.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error number, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.

yellow blue

Playing a Compact Disc

PREV (1): Press this button to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played.

Press PREV again to go to the previous track on the disc.

NEXT (2): Press this button to advance to the next track on the disc.

PROG (3): Press this button to select the next disc in the magazine. If a CD cannot be played, its number will be skipped when selecting discs while using the PROG button.

RANDOM (4): Press this button to enter the random play mode. RDM will appear on the display. While in this mode, the tracks on the discs will be played in random order. If you press PROG or SEEK while in the random mode, discs and tracks will be scanned randomly. Press this button again to turn off the random feature and return to normal operation.

REV (5): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.

3-21

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.

RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing.

When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed.

SEEK: Press the SEEK down arrow while playing a CD to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. If you press it again, the changer will go to previous tracks. Press the SEEK up arrow and it will go to the next higher track on the disc.

TAPE/PLAY: Press this button to play a CD if you have a magazine loaded in the changer and the radio is playing. To return to the radio while a CD is playing, press AM

-

FM. You can also press this button to switch between a cassette tape and CD, if both are loaded.

yellow blue

Theft-Deterrent Feature

THEFTLOCK

R

is designed to discourage theft of your radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed.

The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.

When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display

LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power is removed. If your battery loses power for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate.

3-22

Activating the Theft

-

Deterrent Feature

The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure.

NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.

1. Write down any three or four

digit number from

000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.

3. Turn the radio off.

4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until

---

shows on the display. Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down.

yellow blue

5. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.

6. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.

7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.

8. Press AM

-

FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.

The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code.

9. Press AM

-

FM and this time the display will show

SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.

Note that with the ignition off, the THEFTLOCK LED indicator will flash, indicating a secured radio.

3-23

Unlocking the Theft

-

Deterrent Feature After a

Power Loss

Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than

15 seconds between steps:

1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.

2. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.

3. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.

4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.

5. Press AM

-

FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.

The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is now operable and secure.

If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again. When you try again, you will only have three more chances

(eight tries per chance) to enter the correct code before

INOP appears.

If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.

yellow blue

Disabling the Theft

-

Deterrent Feature

Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than

15 seconds between steps:

1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until SEC shows on the display.

4. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.

5. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.

6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.

7. Press AM

-

FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.

The display will show

---

, indicating that the radio is no longer secured.

If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the display. The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered.

When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on the display.

3-24

To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the

Theft

-

Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

(If Equipped)

If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain radio and remote playback functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.

yellow blue

VOLUME: Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease volume.

PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or compact disc when the radio is playing.

MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it again, or any other radio button, to turn on the sound.

SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio station and the down arrow to tune to the previous radio station. If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the player will advance to the next selection with the up arrow and go to the previous selection with the down arrow.

PRESET: Press this button to play a station you have programmed on the radio preset buttons. When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to change tape sides. If you have the trunk

mounted CD changer, press this button to advance to the next disc in the magazine.

AM

-

FM: Press this button to choose AM, FM1 or FM2.

If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, it will stop and the radio will play.

3-25

Understanding Radio Reception

AM

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.

FM Stereo

FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go.

Tips About Your Audio System

Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it.

To help avoid hearing loss or damage:

D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.

D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle

--

like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two

way radio

--

be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radio or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly.

So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units.

3-26

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player.

Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every

50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.

The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action, non

abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.

The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).

yellow blue

When using a scrubbing action, non

abrasive cleaning cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the following steps.

1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the TAPE/PLAY button for three seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds.

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning time.

When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape detection feature is active again.

3-27

You may also choose a non

scrubbing action, wet

type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own. A non

scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.

The use of a non

scrubbing action, dry

type cleaning cassette is not recommended.

After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display

---

to show the indicator was reset.

Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced.

Care of Your Compact Discs

Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

yellow blue

Care of Your Compact Disc Player

The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Fixed Mast Antenna

The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged. If the mast should ever become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should replace it.

Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the rear quarter panel.

3-28

Backglass Antenna (If Equipped)

Your AM

-

FM antenna is integrated with your rear window defogger, located in the rear window. Be sure that the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio reception.

NOTICE:

Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp. This may damage the rear defogger grid and affect your radio’s ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

yellow blue

Because this antenna is built into your rear window, there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes and vandals.

If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM

-

FM antenna. There is enough space between the lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering with radio reception.

3-29

NOTES

3-30

yellow blue

yellow blue

Section 4 Your Driving and the Road

Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving.

4

-

2

4

-

3

4

-

5

4

-

6

Defensive Driving

Drunken Driving

Control of a Vehicle

Braking

4

-

12

Steering

4

-

14

Off

-

Road Recovery

4

-

14

Passing

4

-

16

Loss of Control

4

-

17

Driving at Night

4

-

18

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

4

-

21

City Driving

4

-

22

Freeway Driving

4

-

23

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

4

-

24

Highway Hypnosis

4

-

25

Hill and Mountain Roads

4

-

27

Winter Driving

4

-

31

Recreational Vehicle Towing

4

-

32

Loading Your Vehicle

4

-

34

Towing a Trailer

4-

4-1

Defensive Driving

The best advice anyone can give about driving is:

Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)

yellow blue

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”

On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means

“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear

end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving task

--

such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the floor

--

makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.

Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.

These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life.

4-2

Drunken Driving

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle:

D Judgment

D Muscular Coordination

D Vision

D Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle

related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor vehicle

related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults

--

by some estimates, nearly half the adult population

--

choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.

There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws.

yellow blue

The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things:

D The amount of alcohol consumed

D The drinker’s body weight

D The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking

D The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association, a

180

lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12

ounce

(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a

BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4

ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1

-

1/2 ounces

(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.

4-3

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis

(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

yellow blue

There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men.

Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks.

The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of

0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching

0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above

0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of

0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of

0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

4-4

yellow blue

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?

A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.

There’s something else about drinking and driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking

--

driver or passenger

--

is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.

Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious

--

or even fatal

--

collision if you drive after drinking.

Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.

Control of a Vehicle

You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.

4-5

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle.

yellow blue

Braking

Braking action involves perception time and

reaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.

That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.

Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).

That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

4-6

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts

--

heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking

--

rather than keeping pace with traffic.

This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.

yellow blue

Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)

Your vehicle has anti

lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive away, your anti

lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

If there’s a problem with the anti

lock brake system, this warning light will stay on.

See “Anti

-

Lock Brake

System Warning Light” in the Index.

4-7

yellow blue

The anti

lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions.

Here’s how anti

lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.

You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you.

You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels.

You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

4-8

Remember: Anti

lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti

lock brakes.

Using Anti

-

Lock

Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti

lock work for you. You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but this is normal.

Traction Control System (With 3800

Supercharged V6 Engine)

Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system works the front brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.

yellow blue

This light will come on when your traction control system is limiting wheel spin. See “Traction Control

System Warning Light” in the Index.

You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may reengage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control” in the Index.)

This light should come on briefly when you start the engine. If it stays on or comes on while you are driving, there’s a problem with your traction control system.

4-9

See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the

Index. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should always leave the system on. But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to.

(You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking

Your Vehicle” in the Index.)

To turn the system off, press the TCS button on the far right end of the trip computer.

The traction control system warning light will come on and stay on. If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the button, the warning light will come on and the system will turn off instantly.

4-10

yellow blue

You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again. The traction control system warning light should go off.

Enhanced Traction System (3100 V6 or

3800 V6 Engine)

Your vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System

(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system reduces engine power and may also upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin.

This light will come on when your Enhanced

Traction System is limiting wheel spin. See “Enhanced

Traction System Warning

Light” in the Index.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the enhanced traction system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may reengage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control” in the Index.)

The Enhanced Traction System operates in all transaxle shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the transaxle only as high as the shift lever position you’ve chosen, so you should use the lower gears only when necessary. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.

This TRAC OFF warning light will come on to let you know if there’s a problem.

yellow blue

To turn the system on or off, press the TRAC button on the far right end of the

Driver Information Center or the optional trip computer.

See “Enhanced Traction System Warning Light” in the

Index. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should always leave the Enhanced

Traction System on. But you can turn the system off if you ever need to. (You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See

“Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.)

When you turn the system off, the Enhanced Traction

System warning light will come on and stay on. If the

Enhanced Traction System is limiting wheel spin when you press the button to turn the system off, the warning light will come on and the system will turn off right away.

You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again. The Enhanced Traction System warning light should go off.

Braking in Emergencies

With anti

lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking.

4-11

Steering

Power Steering

If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Variable Effort Steering (Option)

This steering system provides lighter steering effort for parking and when driving at speeds below 20 mph

(32 km/h). Steering effort will increase at higher speeds for improved road feel.

Steering Tips

Driving on Curves

It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:

yellow blue

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed.

While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.

Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems

--

steering and acceleration

--

have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. Refer to “Traction Control

System” or “Enhanced Traction System” in the Index.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.

4-12

yellow blue

If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking

--

if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.

That’s the time for evasive action

--

steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in

Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-13

Off

-

Road Recovery

You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.

You can turn the steering wheel up to one

quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.

Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

4-14

yellow blue

Passing

The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two

lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two

lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents

--

the head

on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.

D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.

If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass

(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.

Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a

“running start” that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity.

D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.

Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot.

yellow blue

D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.)

D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two

lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle.

D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.

Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn.

D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.

4-15

Loss of Control

Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.

In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.

Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not

“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If you have the Enhanced Traction System, remember:

It helps avoid only the acceleration skid.

4-16

yellow blue

If you do not have the Enhanced Traction System, or if the system is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues

--

such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface”

--

and slow down when you have any doubt.

Remember: Any anti

lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid.

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.

One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired

--

by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

yellow blue

Here are some tips on night driving.

D Drive defensively.

D Don’t drink and drive.

D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you.

D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles.

D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

D In remote areas, watch for animals.

D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.

Night Vision

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50

year

old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20

year

old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible.

4-17

You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean

--

inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness

--

the inability to see in dim light

--

and aren’t even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire

to

road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.

And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

4-18

yellow blue

yellow blue

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking.

It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too.

The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.

But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.

4-19

CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.

yellow blue

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.

This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

4-20

yellow blue

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

NOTICE:

If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips

D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray.

D Have good tires with proper tread depth.

(See “Tires” in the Index.)

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals.

4-21

yellow blue

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

D Know the best way to get to where you are going.

Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross

country trip.

D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”)

D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.

When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

4-22

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too

fast or too

slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your

“blind” spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night.

yellow blue

When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.

The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you’re not fresh

--

such as after a day’s work

--

don’t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you’ll find experienced and able service experts in

Pontiac dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.

4-23

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?

Are all windows clean inside and outside?

D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels?

D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble

free trip. Is the tread good enough for long

distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure?

D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system?

D Maps: Do you have up

to

date maps?

yellow blue

Highway Hypnosis

Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior.

D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your instruments frequently.

D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

4-24

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain.

yellow blue

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transaxle. These parts can work hard on mountain roads.

D Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill.

CAUTION:

If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.

4-25

CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

yellow blue

D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.

D Stay in your own lane when driving on two

lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane.

D As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.

D You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no

passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

4-26

yellow blue

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your trunk.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.

4-27

Driving on Snow or Ice

Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful.

yellow blue

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about freezing (32

_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.

Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition

--

smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow

--

drive with caution.

If you have the Enhanced Traction System, keep the system on. It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle has this system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. See

“Enhanced Traction System” in the Index.

If you don’t have the Enhanced Traction System, accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.

If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more.

4-28

yellow blue

Your anti

lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have the anti

lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See “Anti

-

Lock” in the Index.

D Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.

D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.

Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear.

If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

D Turn on your hazard flashers.

4-29

yellow blue

D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow.

D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.

If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats

--

anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.

This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn’t collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well

charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-30

yellow blue

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes.

Recreational Vehicle Towing

You can tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for use at your destination. Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for recreational towing. Follow the instructions for the towing equipment.

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight

ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing.

5. Release the parking brake.

4-31

Loading Your Vehicle

Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry. The Tire

-

Loading Information label is on the inside of the trunk lid. The label tells you the proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you important information about the number of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight you can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory

installed options.

4-32

The other label is the Certification label, found on the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.

If you do have a heavy load, spread it out. Don’t carry more than 167 pounds (75 kg) in your trunk.

yellow blue

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the

GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear

GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

NOTICE:

Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading.

If you put things inside your vehicle

--

like suitcases, tools, packages or anything else

--

they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

D Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a

trunk, put them as far forward as you can.

Try to spread the weight evenly.

D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,

inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.

D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in

your vehicle.

D When you carry something inside the

vehicle, secure it whenever you can.

4-33

Towing a Trailer

CAUTION:

If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well

--

or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured.

You may also damage your vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is equipped with the

3800 (L67) supercharged engine.

yellow blue

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself.

Trailering means changes in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time

tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.

Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load

pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.

4-34

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer

If you do, here are some important points:

D There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police.

D Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.

D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles

(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

D Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.

Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h)) to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.

yellow blue

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

D the weight of the trailer,

D the weight of the trailer tongue

D and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at:

Pontiac

-

GMC Customer Assistance Center

P.O. Box 436008

Pontiac, MI 48343

-

6008

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

4-35

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your

Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight

carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you have a weight

distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires

Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the

Tire

-

Loading Information label, found on the inside of the trunk lid, or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the

GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

yellow blue

4-36

Hitches

It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.

Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

D Your vehicle may have nonmetallic, composite bumpers. The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper

type hitches to them. Use only a frame

mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper.

D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index).

Dirt and water can, too.

yellow blue

Safety Chains

You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.

And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Because you have anti

lock brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake systems won’t work well, or at all.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.

Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

4-37

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform

(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

NOTICE:

Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.

yellow blue

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.

Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making Turns

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

4-38

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.

Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Your vehicle has bulb warning lights. When you plug a trailer lighting system into your vehicle’s lighting system, its bulb warning lights may not let you know if one of your lamps goes out. So, when you have a trailer lighting system plugged in, be sure to check your vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure they’re all working. Once you disconnect the trailer lamps, the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one of your vehicle lamps is out.

yellow blue

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

If you have overdrive, you may want to drive in

THIRD (3), instead of DRIVE (D).

Parking on Hills

CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.

4-39

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into

PARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave After

Parking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you:

D Start your engine;

D Shift into a gear; and

D Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

yellow blue

Maintenance When Trailer Towing

Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, drive belts, cooling system and brake system.

Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review this information before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing

Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

4-40

yellow blue

Section 5 Problems on the Road

Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.

5

-

2

5

-

2

5

-

3

5

-

8

5

-

9

Hazard Warning Flashers

Other Warning Devices

Jump Starting

Towing Your Vehicle

Engine Overheating

5

5

-

12

Cooling System

5

-

21

If A Tire Goes Flat

5

-

22

Changing a Flat Tire

5

-

32

Compact Spare Tire

-

33

If You’re Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5-

5-1

Hazard Warning Flashers

yellow blue

Press the switch on top of the steering column to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

To turn off the flashers, press the switch again. When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals and brake lamps won’t work.

Other Warning Devices

If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.

5-2

yellow blue

Jump Starting

If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. But please follow the steps listed to do it safely.

CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:

D They contain acid that can burn you.

D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.

D They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.

NOTICE:

Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

The ACDelco Freedom

R

battery in your vehicle has a built

in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12

volt battery with a negative ground system.

NOTICE:

If the other system isn’t a 12

volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.

5-3

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump starting procedure. Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) before setting the parking brake.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save your radio!

CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

4. Find the positive (+) and negative (

-

) terminals on each battery. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting terminal. The terminal is on the same side of the engine compartment as your battery. You should always use the remote positive (+) terminal instead of the positive (+) terminal on your battery.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

If you leave your radio on, it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

5-4

yellow blue

To uncover the remote positive (+) terminal, squeeze the sides of the plastic cap and slide the plastic cap off.

CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t need to add water to the ACDelco Freedom

R

battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.

Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.

5-5

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.

The vehicles could be damaged, too.

CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.

yellow blue

5-6

Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (

-

) will go to negative (

-

) or a metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (

-

), or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

yellow blue

7. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (

-

) cable to the good battery’s negative

(

-

) terminal. Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (

-

) cable

doesn’t go to the dead battery.

It goes to a heavy, unpainted, metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery.

9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.

5-7

12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch each other or any other metal.

Towing Your Vehicle

CAUTION:

To help avoid serious personal injury to you or others:

D Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is

being towed.

D Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.

D Never tow with damaged parts not

fully secured.

D Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by the tow truck.

D Always secure the vehicle on each side with

separate safety chains when towing it.

D Use only the correct hooks.

A. Heavy Metal Engine Part

B. Good Battery

C. Dead Battery

NOTICE:

Use the proper towing equipment to avoid damage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areas of the vehicle.

5-8

yellow blue

With current trends in automotive styles and design, it is essential that the correct towing equipment is used to tow a vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed with wheel lift or car carrier equipment. Don’t have your vehicle towed on the drive wheels, unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on the drive wheels, do not tow the vehicle more than 500 cumulative miles (800 km) or exceed

50 mph (80 km/h). If these limitations must be exceeded, then the drive wheels have to be supported on a dolly.

Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside

Assistance” in the Index.

Engine Overheating

You will find a coolant temperature gage and a warning light about a hot engine on your instrument panel. See

“Engine Coolant Temperature Gage” and “Engine

Coolant Temperature Light” in the Index. You also have a low coolant light on your instrument panel. See “Low

Coolant Light” in the Index.

yellow blue

Overheated Engine Protection Operating

Mode (3100 V6 Engine Only)

This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.

Should an overheated engine condition exist, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of three cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a significant loss in power and engine performance. The low coolant light may come on and the temperature gage will indicate an overheat condition exists. Towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided.

NOTICE:

After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.

The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

5-9

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. If your vehicle has the

3100 V6 engine, see “Overheated Engine

Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.

5-10

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

D Climb a long hill on a hot day.

D Stop after high

speed driving.

D Idle for long periods in traffic.

D Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary.

3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving

--

or DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3).

yellow blue

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.

If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.

If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the

vehicle until it cools down. If your vehicle has the

3100 V6 engine, see “Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode” listed previously in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.

5-11

Cooling System

When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what you’ll see:

3100 Engine

A. Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

C. Radiator Pressure Cap

5-12

3800 and 3800 Supercharged Engine

A. Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

C. Radiator Pressure Cap

yellow blue

CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down.

yellow blue

The coolant level should be at or above the COLD mark on the coolant recovery tank. If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.

Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

5-13

NOTICE:

Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.

See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating

Mode” in the Index.

NOTICE:

When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX

-

COOL

R

(silicate

free) coolant.

If coolant other than DEX

-

COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner

--

at

30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX

-

COOL

R

is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.

5-14

yellow blue

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant

Recovery Tank

If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at the COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and DEX

-

COOL

R

engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant” in the

Index for more information.)

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and

DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the

COLD mark, start your vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it.

5-15

CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap

--

even a little

--

they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

NOTICE:

Your engine has a specific radiator fill procedure.

Failure to follow this procedure could cause your engine to overheat and be severely damaged.

yellow blue

5-16

yellow blue

1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.)

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

5-17

3. If you have the 3800 V6 engine, remove the

3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield to access the bleed valve.

A. Clean the area around the engine oil fill tube and cap before removing. Twist the oil fill tube, with cap attached, counterclockwise and remove it.

B. If you have the supercharged engine, remove the nut in the center of the cover shield.

C. Lift the engine cover shield at the front, slide the catch tab out of the engine bracket and remove the cover shield.

D. Put the oil fill tube, with cap attached, in the valve cover oil fill hole until you’re ready to replace the cover shield.

Thermostat Housing

(3100 V6)

Thermostat Bypass

Tube (3100 V6)

yellow blue

5-18

yellow blue

Thermostat Housing

(3800 V6)

4. After the engine cools, open the coolant air bleed valve or valves.

3100 V6 engine: There are two bleed valves. One is located on the thermostat housing. The other is located on the thermostat bypass tube.

3800 V6 engine: There is one bleed valve. It is located on the thermostat housing.

5. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX

-

COOL

R coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.

(See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mixture.)

If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close the valves after the radiator is filled.

6. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine and the compartment.

5-19

7. If you have the 3800 V6 engine, replace the

3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield.

A. Remove the oil fill tube, with cap attached, from the valve cover.

B. Insert the catch tab on the cover shield under the bracket on the engine.

C. Place the hole in the cover shield over the hole in the valve cover. Install oil fill tube and cap by twisting clockwise.

D. If you have the supercharged engine, install the nut in the center of the cover shield.

yellow blue

8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL mark.

9. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

10. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fans.

11. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck.

5-20

12. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.

13. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. The level in the coolant recovery tank should be at the HOT mark when the engine is hot or at the COLD mark when the engine is cold.

yellow blue

If a Tire Goes Flat

It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.

But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.

Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop

--

well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-21

yellow blue

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers.

CAUTION:

Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people. You and they could be badly injured.

Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine.

To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move, you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed.

That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire.

5-22

yellow blue

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk. Pull the carpeting from the floor of the trunk. Then lift and remove the cover.

Turn the center nut on the compact spare cover counterclockwise to remove it.

Remove the compact spare tire. See “Compact Spare

Tire” in the Index for more information about the compact spare.

5-23

Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) extension and protector/guide (B) and wheel wrench (C).

5-24

yellow blue

If there is a wheel cover, loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench.

They won’t come off. Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry along the edge of the cover until it comes off.

yellow blue

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire

1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.

Don’t remove them yet.

2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack lift head a few inches.

5-25

yellow blue

For jacking at the vehicle’s front location, put jack lift about 6 inches (15 cm) from the rear edge of the front wheel opening or between the two bolts as shown.

For jacking at the vehicle’s rear location, put the jack lift head about 5.5 inches (14 cm) from the front edge of the rear wheel opening or just behind the off

set as shown.

Put the compact spare tire near you.

5-26

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.

3. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle.

Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

5-27

4. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel.

CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident.

5. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface.

6. Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

5-28

yellow blue

yellow blue

8. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown.

7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

9. Replace wheel trim. If present, tighten plastic caps by hand. With a wheel wrench tighten plastic caps an additional 1/4 turn.

5-29

CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident.

Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.

Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to

100 lb

ft (140 N·m.)

NOTICE:

Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification.

yellow blue

Don’t try to put the wheel cover on your compact spare tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

NOTICE:

Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.

After you’ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle, you’ll need to store the flat tire in your trunk. Use the following procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk.

5-30

yellow blue

Storing the Spare Tire and Tools

CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.

When storing a full

size tire, you must use the extension to help avoid wheel surface damage. Use the extension and protector/guide located in the foam holder. To store a full

size tire, place the tire in the trunk valve stem facing down, with the protector/guide through a wheel bolt hole. Remove the protector and attach the retainer securely. When reinstalling the compact spare, put the protector/guide back in the foam holder. Store the cover as far forward as possible.

The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace the compact spare tire with a full

size tire as soon as you can. See “Compact Spare Tire” in the Index. See the storage instructions label to replace your compact spare in your trunk properly.

Be sure to calibrate your check tire pressure system after you replace your compact spare tire with a full

sized one. See “Check Tire Pressure Light” in the Index.

5-31

5-32

1. Retainer

2. Cover

3. Retainer (Full

Size Spare)

4. Tire

5. Nut

6. Jack

7. Wrench

8. Lock Nut Tool

9. Foam

10. Bolt Screw

11. Nut Extension and Protector/Guide

yellow blue

Compact Spare Tire

Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.

Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be

60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph

(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have your full

size tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with a full

size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again.

NOTICE:

When the compact spare is installed, don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.

NOTICE:

Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your compact spare.

yellow blue

If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,

Ice or Snow

In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must use caution.

CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

5-33

NOTICE:

Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle.

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see “Tire Chains” in the Index.

yellow blue

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out

First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System, you should turn the system off. (See “Enhanced Traction System” in the

Index.) Then shift back and forth between REVERSE

(R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing

Your Vehicle” in the Index.

5-34

yellow blue

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.

6

-

2

6

-

3

6

-

5

Service

Fuel

Fuels in Foreign Countries

6

-

6

6

-

8

Filling Your Tank

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

6

6

-

8

Checking Things Under the Hood

-

13

Engine Oil

6

-

20

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

6

-

21

Supercharger Oil

6

-

22

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

6

-

26

Engine Coolant

6

-

29

Power Steering Fluid

6

-

31

Windshield Washer Fluid

6

-

32

Brakes

6

-

35

Battery

6

-

36

Bulb Replacement

6

-

42

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

6

-

43

Tires

6-

6

-

51

Appearance Care

6

-

51

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle

6

-

54

Care of Safety Belts

6

-

55

Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle

6

-

56

Cleaning Aluminum Wheels (If Equipped)

6

-

56

Cleaning Tires

6

-

57

Sheet Metal Damage

6

-

57

Finish Damage

6

-

57

Underbody Maintenance

6

-

57

Chemical Paint Spotting

6

-

58

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

6

-

59

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

6

-

59

Service Parts Identification Label

6

-

60

Electrical System

6

-

66

Replacement Bulbs

6

-

66

Capacities and Specifications

6

-

68

Air Conditioning Refrigerants

6

-

68

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

6-1

Service

Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and

GM

trained and supported service people.

We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

yellow blue

Doing Your Own Service Work

If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air

Bag

-

Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.

6-2

CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it.

D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,

experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task.

D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and

other fasteners. “English” and “metric” fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle

Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

yellow blue

Fuel

The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number

(VIN) shows the code letter for your engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel.

(See “Vehicle Identification Number” in the Index.)

If you have the 3100 V6 engine (VIN Code M) or

3800 V6 engine (VIN Code K), use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem.

If you have the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine (VIN

Code 1), use premium unleaded gasoline rated at

91 octane or higher. With the 3800 Supercharged engine, in an emergency, you may be able to use a lower octane

--

as low as 87

--

if heavy knocking does not occur. If you are using 91 or higher octane unleaded gasoline and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.

6-3

It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications which have been developed by the American

Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers

Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines. For more information, write to: American

Automobile Manufacturer’s Association, 7430 Second

Ave, Suite 300, Detroit MI 48202.

Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 91 (at least 89 for middle grade and 87 for regular). If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.

If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission

Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet

California specifications. If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your

yellow blue

vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a smog

check test. (See “Malfunction

Indicator Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane

enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing

MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for service.

6-4

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system, allowing your emission control system to function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier.

NOTICE:

Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty.

yellow blue

Fuels in Foreign Countries

If you plan on driving in another country outside the

United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you’ll be driving.

You can also write us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

6-5

Filling Your Tank

The cap is behind the fuel door on the driver’s side of your vehicle.

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.

Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline.

6-6

While refueling, hang the cap by the tether from the pin on the fuel door.

To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left

(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.

CAUTION:

If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned.

Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the

Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.

When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right

(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.

6-7

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:

D Dispense gasoline only into

approved containers.

D Do not fill a container while it is inside a

vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground.

D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the

inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete.

D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Under the Hood

CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running.

Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

6-8

yellow blue

Hood Release

To open the hood, first pull the handle inside the vehicle. It is located at the lower, left

hand side of the vehicle, near the parking brake.

Next go to the front of the vehicle and release the secondary hood release. Lift the hood.

6-9

When you open the hood of the 3100 engine, you’ll see:

A. Windshield Washer Fluid

B. Battery

C. Radiator Fill Cap

D. Engine Coolant Reservoir

6-10

E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap

G. Engine Oil Dipstick

H. Automatic Transaxle Dipstick

I. Brake Fluid Reservoir

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

yellow blue

When you open the hood of the 3800 engine, you’ll see:

yellow blue

A. Windshield Washer Fluid

B. Battery

C. Radiator Fill Cap

D. Engine Coolant Reservoir

E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

(low in engine compartment)

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap

G. Engine Oil Dipstick

H. Automatic Transaxle Dipstick

I. Brake Fluid Reservoir

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

6-11

When you open the hood of the 3800 Supercharged engine, you’ll see:

yellow blue

A. Windshield Washer Fluid

B. Battery

C. Radiator Fill Cap

D. Engine Coolant Reservoir

6-12

E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

(low in engine compartment)

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap

G. Engine Oil Dipstick

H. Automatic Transaxle Dipstick

I. Brake Fluid Reservoir

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

yellow blue

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then just pull the hood down and close it firmly.

3800 Supercharged Engine

(If Equipped)

Your vehicle may have a 3800 Supercharged engine.

The supercharger is a device which is designed to pump more air into the engine than it would normally use.

This air, mixed with fuel, creates increased engine power. Since the supercharger is a pump and is driven from an engine accessory drive belt, increased pressure is available at all driving conditions.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) works with a vacuum control to regulate the increased pressure required during specific driving conditions. When this increased pressure or boost is not desired, such as during idling and light throttle cruising, the excess air that the supercharger is pumping is routed through a bypass. All of these controls working together provide high performance character and fuel efficiency in the 3800

Supercharged engine.

Engine Oil

If the LOW OIL LEVEL light on the instrument panel comes on, it means you need to check your engine oil level right away.

For more information, see “Low Oil Level Light” in the

Index. You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder.

It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

6-13

The engine oil dipstick handle is the yellow loop near the front of the engine.

yellow blue

Checking Engine Oil

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

3100 Engine 3800 or 3800

Supercharged Engine

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

3100 Engine

6-14

yellow blue

NOTICE:

Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross

hatched area that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged.

3800 Engine

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.

3100 Engine 3800 or 3800

Supercharged Engine

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through.

6-15

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol.

If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engine is

American Petroleum

Institute certified for gasoline engines.

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the following chart:

6-16

3100 Engine

yellow blue

As shown in the chart, if you have the 3100 V6 engine,

SAE 5W

-

30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W

-

30 if it’s going to be 0

_F (

-

18

_C) or above. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W

-

50.

yellow blue

3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine

6-17

As shown in the chart, if you have the 3800 V6 engine,

SAE 10W

-

30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 5W

-

30 if it’s going to be colder than 60

(16

_C) before your next oil change. When it’s very cold, you should use SAE 5W

-

_F

30. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W

-

50.

yellow blue

GM Goodwrench

R

oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle.

If you are in an area where the temperature falls below

-

20

_F (

-

29

_C), consider using either an SAE 5W

-

30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W

-

30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures.

NOTICE:

Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum

Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines

“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.

6-18

Engine Oil Additives

Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added.

When to Change Engine Oil

Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to change your engine oil. This is not based on mileage, but on engine revolutions and engine operating temperature. When the computer has calculated that the oil needs changing, the Oil Life Monitor will indicate that a change is necessary. The mileage between oil changes will vary depending on how you drive your vehicle

--

usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and

7,500 miles (12 500 km) since your last oil change.

Under severe conditions, the indicator may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months

(whichever occurs first) without an oil change.

The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So, if you drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil every

3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner. Remember to reset the Oil Life Monitor whenever the oil is changed.

yellow blue

How to Reset the Oil Life Monitor

To reset the Oil Life Monitor after the oil has been changed:

1. Press the MODE button until the light appears lit next to OIL LIFE.

2. Press and hold the RESET button for three seconds.

The oil life percentage should change to 100%.

What to Do with Used Oil

Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.)

Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free

flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help.

6-19

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

To check or replace the air cleaner/filter:

yellow blue

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air filter.

See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

1. Loosen the two clips on the top of the air cleaner housing and lift the filter cover tabs out of the housing.

2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine, compressing the duct convolutes.

3. Pull out the filter. Install the air filter and make sure the filter cover tabs position through the slots in the housing.

4. A notch on the sides of the filter cover will indicate the correct engagement. Re

clip the two clips on the top of the housing when you are finished.

6-20

NOTICE:

If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you’re driving.

Supercharger Oil

Unless you are technically qualified and have the proper tools, you should let your dealer or a qualified service center perform this maintenance.

When to Check

Check oil level every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or every

36 months, whichever occurs first.

What Kind of Oil to Use

See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index and use only the recommended oil.

yellow blue

How to Check and Add Oil

Check oil only when the engine is cold. Allow the engine to cool two to three hours after running.

CAUTION:

If you remove the supercharger oil fill plug while the engine is hot, pressure may cause hot oil to blow out of the oil fill hole. You may be burned.

Do not remove the plug until the engine cools.

1. Clean the area around the oil fill plug before removing it.

2. Remove the oil fill plug using a 3/16 inch

Allen wrench.

3. The oil level is correct when it just reaches the bottom of the threads of the inspection hole.

4. Replace the oil plug with the O

ring in place. Torque to 88 lb

in (10 N·m).

6-21

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and Change

A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles

(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90

_F (32_C) or higher.

D In hilly or mountainous terrain.

D When doing frequent trailer towing.

D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter at

100,000 miles (166 000 km).

See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

How to Check

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

NOTICE:

Too much or too little fluid can damage your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid.

yellow blue

6-22

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

D When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).

D At high speed for quite a while.

D In heavy traffic

--

especially in hot weather.

D While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180

_F to

200

_F (82_C to 93_C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles

(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50

_F

(10

_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), you may have to drive longer.

Checking the Fluid Level

D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running.

D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P).

D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

yellow blue

D Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

3100 Engine 3800 or 3800

Supercharged Engine

1. The transaxle fluid dipstick handle is the red loop near the back of the engine. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

6-23

yellow blue

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again.

6-24

3100 Engine

3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the cross

hatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way.

How to Add Fluid

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended

Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the cross

hatched area on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long

neck funnel, add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.

It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.

NOTICE:

We recommend you use only fluid labeled

DEXRON

R

-

III, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transaxle.

Damage caused by fluid other than

DEXRON

R

-

III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.”

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way.

yellow blue

Radiator Pressure Cap

NOTICE:

Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure

type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.

When you replace your radiator pressure cap, an

ACDelco

R

cap is recommended.

Thermostat

Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature.

When you replace your thermostat, an ACDelco

R thermostat is recommended.

6-25

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with

DEX

-

COOL

R

engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles

(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only

DEX

-

COOL

R

extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to your radiator, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and

DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant will:

D Give freezing protection down to

-

34

_F (

-

37

_C).

D Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).

D Protect against rust and corrosion.

D Help keep the proper engine temperature.

D Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.

NOTICE:

When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX

-

COOL

R

(silicate

free) coolant.

If coolant other than DEX

-

COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner

--

at

30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX

-

COOL

R

is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

yellow blue

6-26

What to Use

Use a mixture of one

half clean, drinkable water and one

half DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don’t need to add anything else.

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and

DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.

The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system.

NOTICE:

If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful.

6-27

Checking Coolant

yellow blue

If this LOW COOLANT light comes on and stays on, it means you’re low on engine coolant.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLD mark or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be up to the HOT mark or a little higher.

Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX

-

COOL

R coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add coolant to the radiator. (See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.)

6-28

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.

With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure cap

--

even a little

--

when the engine and radiator are hot.

Power Steering Fluid

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

3100 Engine 3800 or 3800

Supercharged Engine

The power steering fluid reservoir is toward the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger’s side.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid

It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

6-29

yellow blue

How to Check Power Steering Fluid

When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the C or COLD mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.

3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine

When the engine compartment is hot, the level should be at the H or HOT mark. When it’s cold, the level should be at the C or COLD mark. If the fluid is at the ADD mark, you should add fluid.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see

“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

6-30

3100 Engine

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to Use

When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

yellow blue

Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add washer fluid until the tank is full.

NOTICE:

D When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.

D Don’t mix water with ready

to

use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.

D Fill your washer fluid tank only

three

quarters full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.

D Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in

your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint.

6-31

Brakes

Brake Fluid

yellow blue

of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.

So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.

Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add

(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. It is filled with DOT

-

3 brake fluid.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out

6-32

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning

Light” in the Index.

What to Add

When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT

-

3 brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.

Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the

Maintenance Schedule.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral

based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

D If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s

painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index.

6-33

Brake Wear

Your vehicle has four

wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built

in wear indicators that make a high

pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).

CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

NOTICE:

Continuing to drive with worn

out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.

yellow blue

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.

See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake Adjustment

Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

6-34

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top

quality GM brake parts.

When you replace parts of your braking system

--

for example, when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in

--

be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change

--

for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.

Battery

Your new vehicle comes with an ACDelco Freedom

R battery. When it’s time for a new battery, we recommend an ACDelco Freedom battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label.

If your battery has a very low charge or is dead, you may not be able to remove the ignition key from the ignition switch or shift out of PARK (P). Refer to

“Shifting Out of Park (P)” in the Index.

yellow blue

Vehicle Storage

If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, remove the black, negative (

-

) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down.

CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.

Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods.

Also, for your audio system, see “Theft

-

Deterrent

Feature” in the Index.

6-35

Bulb Replacement

In this section, you’ll find directions for changing the bulbs on your vehicle. See “Replacement Bulbs” in the

Index to find the type of bulb you should use.

Halogen Bulbs

CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.

Headlamps

1. Open the hood and support properly.

2. Remove the two bolts from the top of the headlamp assembly.

yellow blue

6-36

yellow blue

3. Carefully remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle. Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on the vehicle while removing.

4. Lift the plastic tab on the electrical connector and pull the connector.

5. Turn the lamp socket ring a quarter of a turn counterclockwise to remove it from the headlamp assembly.

6-37

Front Turn Signal

1. Open the hood and support properly.

yellow blue

6. Pull the bulb from the socket.

7. Place the new bulb into the socket.

8. Turn the lamp socket ring a quarter of a turn clockwise to place it back into the headlamp assembly.

9. Lift the plastic tab on the electrical connector and replace the connector.

10. Carefully replace the headlamp assembly. Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on the vehicle while replacing the assembly.

11. Replace the two bolts on the top of the headlamp assembly.

12. Close the hood.

6-38

2. Remove the two bolts from the top of the headlamp assembly.

3. Carefully remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle. Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on the vehicle while replacing.

4. Turn the front sidemarker bulb socket a quarter of a turn counterclockwise to remove.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

1. Open the trunk.

yellow blue

5. Remove the bulb from the socket.

6. Place the new bulb into the socket.

7. Turn the bulb socket a quarter of a turn clockwise to replace it.

8. Carefully replace the headlamp assembly. Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on the vehicle while replacing.

9. Replace the two bolts on the top of the headlamp assembly.

10. Close the hood.

2. Reach through the access opening in the trunk and remove the slotted vent by squeezing the ends and pulling down.

6-39

Taillamps

1. Unhook the convenience net (if equipped) and remove.

yellow blue

3. Remove the bulb by turning it a quarter of a turn counterclockwise.

4. Place the new bulb into the bulb socket.

5. Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn clockwise to replace. Replace the vent you removed earlier.

6. Close the trunk.

2. Unscrew the upper convenience net hook attachment.

3. Pull the trunk trim carpeting back from the rear of the trunk.

4. Remove the upper trunk trim hook and the two plastic wing nuts from the taillamp.

6-40

yellow blue

5. Carefully remove the taillamp assembly. Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on the vehicle.

6. Turn the lamp socket a quarter of a turn counterclockwise to remove.

6-41

7. Remove the bulb.

8. Place the new bulb into the socket.

9. Turn the lamp socket a quarter of a turn clockwise to replace it.

10. Carefully replace the taillamp assembly. Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the vehicle paint.

11. Reverse Steps 1 through 4.

12. Close the rear compartment.

6-42

yellow blue

Windshield Wiper

Blade Replacement

Windshield wiper blades should be inspected as least twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade

Check” in Section 7 of this manual under Part B “Owner

Checks and Services” for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For the proper type and length, see “Normal Maintenance and Replacement

Parts” in the Index.

Here’s how to remove the wiper blade:

yellow blue

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.

3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

Tires

Your new vehicle comes with high

quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Pontiac Warranty booklet for details.

CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.

D Overloading your tires can cause

overheating as a result of too much friction.

You could have an air

out and a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.

D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as

overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold.

D Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,

punctured or broken by a sudden impact

--

such as when you hit a pothole.

Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your

tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.

6-43

yellow blue

Inflation -- Tire Pressure

The Tire

-

Loading Information label, which is on the inside of the trunk lid, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

NOTICE:

Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get the following:

D Too much flexing

D Too much heat

D Tire overloading

D Bad wear

D Bad handling

D Bad fuel economy.

NOTICE: (Continued)

NOTICE: (Continued)

If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get the following:

D Unusual wear

D Bad handling

D Rough ride

D Needless damage from road hazards.

When to Check

Check your tires once a month or more.

Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at

60 psi (420 kPa).

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket

type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

6-44

Tire Inspection and Rotation

Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles

(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and

“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled

Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals.

yellow blue

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here.

Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire

-

Loading

Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. (See

“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)

6-45

When It’s Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true:

D You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire.

D You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber.

D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

yellow blue

D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.

Buying New Tires

To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the Tire

-

Loading Information label.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all

season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”

(for mud and snow).

If you ever replace your tires with those not having a

TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias

belted or radial) as your original tires.

6-46

CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types

(radial and bias

belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash.

Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels.

It’s all right to drive with your compact spare, though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.

CAUTION:

If you use bias

ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial

ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

yellow blue

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter

type snow tires, space

saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited

production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire

Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

6-47

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

--

AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,

B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight

ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

yellow blue

Temperature

--

A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

6-48

yellow blue

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement

Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load

carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.

It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

NOTICE:

The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.

See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.

6-49

Used Replacement Wheels

CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause an accident. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

NOTICE:

If your vehicle has P225/60R16 size tires, don’t use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.

NOTICE: (Continued)

NOTICE: (Continued)

Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the front tires.

If you have other tires, use tire chains only where legal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class

“S” type chains that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.

yellow blue

6-50

Appearance Care

Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.

When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.

Never use these to clean your vehicle:

D Gasoline

D Benzene

D Naphtha

D Carbon Tetrachloride

D Acetone

D Paint Thinner

D Turpentine

D Lacquer Thinner

D Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous

--

some more than others

--

and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

yellow blue

Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.

In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

D Alcohol

D Laundry Soap

D Bleach

D Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle

Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.

Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet

Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi

-

Purpose Interior

Cleaner and Capture Non

-

Solvent Dry Spot and Soil

Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. You can get

GM

approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See

“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

Here are some cleaning tips:

D Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

D Clean up stains as soon as you can

--

before they set.

D Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

6-51

D Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.

D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set.

Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner on Fabric

1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.

2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.

3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on the container label to form thick suds.

4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.

5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove the suds.

6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.

7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems

Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and blood can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water.

2. If a stain remains, follow the multi

purpose interior cleaner instructions described earlier.

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:

1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.

4. Let dry.

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.

3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for

Multi

-

Purpose Interior Cleaner.

yellow blue

6-52

Cleaning Vinyl

Use warm water and a clean cloth.

D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do it more than once.

D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

Cleaning Leather

Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent

based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.

D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather.

yellow blue

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel

Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions.

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components

Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish.

6-53

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection.

Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.

Cleaning Glass Surfaces

Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. (See

“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

yellow blue

Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.

Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid.

Cleaning the Outside of the

Windshield and Wiper Blades

If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with GM

Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami

R

Powder (non

scratching glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full

strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn.

6-54

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended

Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)

Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle

The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your Vehicle

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.

Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.

Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get

GM

approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See

“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that

yellow blue

contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all

cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a vehicle washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM

approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.

The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non

abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

6-55

NOTICE:

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non

abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Cleaning Aluminum Wheels

(If Equipped)

Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied.

6-56

yellow blue

The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on any wheels other than chrome

plated wheels.

Don’t take your car through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Cleaning Tires

To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.

NOTICE:

When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.

Petroleum

based products may damage the paint finish and tires.

Sheet Metal Damage

If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti

corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch

up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.

yellow blue

At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.

Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet

shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Pontiac will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within

12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

6-57

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

PART NUMBER

994954

1050172

1050173

1050174

1050214

1050427

1052918**

1052925

1052929

1052930

12345721

12345725

12377964*

12377966*

SIZE

23 in. x 25 in.

16 oz. (0.473 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner

32 oz. (0.946 L)

23 oz. (0.680 L)

Vinyl Cleaner

Glass Cleaner

8 oz. (0.237 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

8 oz. (0.237 L)

2.5 sq. ft.

12 oz. (0.354 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

DESCRIPTION

Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated

USAGE

Exterior polishing cloth

Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil and asphalt

Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass

Armor All t Protectant

Multi-Purpose Interior

Cleaner

Wheel Cleaner

Capture Dry Spot Remover

Synthetic Chamois

Silicone Tire Shine

Finish Enhancer

Cleaner Wax

12377984* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Surface Cleaner

See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.

See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls

Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops

Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints

Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas t, plastic, rubber and vinyl

Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels and floor mats

Spray on and rinse with water

Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric

Shines vehicle without scratching

Spray on tire shine

Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants

Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish

Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks

* For exterior use only.

** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.

yellow blue

6-58

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.

yellow blue

Engine Identification

The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification Label

You’ll find this label on the underside of your trunk lid.

It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:

D your VIN,

D the model designation,

D paint information and

D a list of all production options and special equipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

6-59

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

NOTICE:

Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add

on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing

Your Air Bag

-

Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

Headlamp Wiring

The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in the instrument panel fuse block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp system checked right away.

6-60

yellow blue

Windshield Wipers

The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power Options

Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver

colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. Spare fuses are located in the instrument panel. See “Underhood Electrical Center” in the Index.

yellow blue

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Some fuses are in a fuse block located inside of the glove box behind a small bin on the right side. To open, pull the cover out. The fuse block is inside. On the back edge of this cover is a fuse puller and a fuse usage chart.

To use the fuse puller, place the wide end of the fuse puller over the plastic end of the fuse. Squeeze the ends over the fuse and pull it out.

To reinstall the bin, position the lower end and turn the top into position. Press on the sides until it snaps into place.

Circuit

Breaker

HEADLAMP

SEAT

PWR WDO

Description

Headlamps

Power Seat, Power Lumbar

Power Windows

6-61

Fuse

MALL PGM

MALL

WIPER

STR WHL

ILLUM

STR WHL

CTRL

SUNROOF

RADIO

RADIO AMP

PWR LOCK

HSEAT/LUM

R DEFOG

RAP

HAZARD

PWR MIR

HVAC HI

Description

Mall Module

--

Program

Mall Module

Wipers

Steering Wheel Illumination

Steering Wheel Control

Sunroof

Radio, Antenna

Bose Amplifier

Mall Module

--

Power Locks

Heated Seats, Power Lumbar

Rear Defog

Retained Accessory Power

Hazard Flashers

Power Mirrors

HVAC Blower

--

Hi

6-62

Fuse

CIG LTR

INT LAMP

STOP LAMP

AUX/CNSL

CD CHG

ECM

CRUISE

I/P

-

IGN

SIR

TURN

BTSI

HVAC CTRL

Description

Cigarette Lighter, ALDL, Floor

Console Auxiliary Outlet

Mall Module

--

Interior lamps

Stoplamp

Auxiliary Power, Overhead

Console

CD Changer

Electronic Control Module

Cruise Control

Chime/Mall Module, Cluster, Trip

Computer, Head

-

Up Display,

Brake

-

Transaxle Shift Interlock

Supplemental Inflatable Restraint

(Air Bag)

Turn Signal

PRNDL, Brake

-

Transaxle Shift

Interlock

Blower Control, HVAC

yellow blue

Fuse

DIC/HVAC

PWR DROP

CANISTER

VENT

DRL

Description

Rear Defog, HVAC, Driver

Information Center, Daytime

Running Lamps, Heated Seats

Power Drop Ignition

Canister Vent Solenoid

Daytime Running Lamps

yellow blue

Underhood Electrical

Center -- Passenger’s Side

Some fuses are in a fuse block on the passenger’s side of the engine compartment. Pull off the cover labeled FUSES to expose the fuses.

6-63

6-64

Fuse

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

Description

Cooling Fan 2

Spare

Headlamps

Battery Main 2

Ignition Main 1

Cooling Fan 1

Battery Main 1

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

Fuse

8

18

19

20

21

Description

Ignition Main 2

Fuel Injections

Spare

Spare

Mass Air Flow (MAF), Heated

Sensors, Canister Purge, Boost

Solenoid

Spare

Spare

Spare

Ignition Module

Spare

Trunk Release, Back

-

Up Lamps

AC Clutch, ABS Ignition

Radio, Remote Keyless Entry,

Theft

-

Deterrent, Shock Sensor,

Trip Computer, HVAC Module,

Anti

-

Lock Brake System Module,

Security LED

yellow blue

34

35

36

37

Fuse

30

31

32

33

38

39

40

Description

Alt Sense

Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)

Fuel Pump

Electronic Control

Module/Powertrain Control

Module

Spare

Fog Lamps

Horn

Chime/Mall Module, Taillamps,

Parking Lamps, Sidemarker

Lamps, Dimmable Lamps

Spare Fuse

Fog Lamps

Spare

Air Conditioning Clutch Diode

Relay

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Description

Cooling Fan

Cooling Fan 2

Ignition Main

Cooling Fan 1

Air Conditioning Clutch

Fuel Pump

Fuel Pump Speed Cont

Horn

Fog Lamp

yellow blue

6-65

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamps

Back

-

Up

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bulb Number

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3156

Center High

-

Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141

Front Parking/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3357 NAK

Headlamps High/Low Beam

Stop/Tail/Turn Signal

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Sidemarker

Rear Sidemarker

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9007

3057

194

194

Capacities and Specifications

Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information.

Automatic Transaxle with Overdrive

Pan Removal and Replacement . . . 8.0 quarts (7.5 L)

After Complete Overhaul . . . . . . . 10.0 quarts (9.5 L)

*When draining/replacing converter or auxiliary cooler, more fluid may be needed.

yellow blue

Cooling System Including Reservoir

3100 (Code M)

3800 (Code K)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.0 quarts (10.42 L)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 quarts (11.7 L)

3800 Supercharged (Code 1)

Refrigerant (R

-

134a),

. . . . 12.3 quarts (11.7 L)

Air Conditioning*

. . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 lbs. (0.85 kg)

Engine Crankcase (Oil Change with Filter Change)

3100 (Code M)

3800 (Code K)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5 quarts (4.3 L)

4.5 quarts (4.3 L)

3800 Supercharged (Code 1)

Fuel Tank

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5 quarts (4.3 L)

17.7 gallons (67 L)

*See “Air Conditioning Refrigerants” later in this section.

Note: All capacities are approximate. When adding fluid, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information.

6-66

3100 (Code M) Engine Specifications

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V6

Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 CID (3.1L L82)

Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Thermostat Temperature . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

2

-

3

-

4

-

5

-

6

195

_F (91_C)

Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

3800 (Code K) Engine Specifications

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V6

Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 CID (3.8L L36)

Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Thermostat Temperature . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

6

-

5

-

4

-

3

-

2

195

_F (91_C)

Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

yellow blue

3800 Supercharged (Code 1)

Engine Specifications

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V6

Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 CID (3.8L L67)

Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Thermostat Temperature . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

6

-

5

-

4

-

3

-

2

195

_F (91_C)

Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

6-67

Air Conditioning Refrigerants

Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same. If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you’re not sure, ask your dealer.

Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . z4508572 or A1096C

Battery

3100 (Code M)

3800 (Code K)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 CCA

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 CCA

3800 Supercharged (Code 1)

Engine Oil Filter

. . . . . . . . . . . . 770 CCA

All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type PF47

PCV Valve

All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CV892C

Radiator Cap

All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type RC27

yellow blue

Spark Plugs

3100 (Code M)

3800 (Code K)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41

-

940

Gap: 0.060 inches (1.52 cm)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41

-

921

Gap: 0.060 inches (1.52 cm)

3800 Supercharged

(Code 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41

-

921 or NGK

Type PTR4B

-

15

Gap: 0.060 inches (1.52 cm)

Wiper Blades

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hook

Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 inches (50.8 cm)

Vehicle Dimensions

Wheelbase

Tread Width

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110.5 inches (280.7 cm)

Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62.0 inches (157.5 cm)

Rear

Length

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61.5 inches (156.1 cm)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196.5 inches (499.1 cm)

Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72.7 inches (184.5 cm)

Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.7 inches (139.0 cm)

6-68

yellow blue

Section 7 Maintenance Schedule

This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety, dependability and emission control performance.

7

-

2

7

-

3

7

-

3

7

-

5

Introduction

How this Section is Organized

Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services

Scheduled Maintenance

7

-

14

Part B: Owner Checks and Services

7

-

18

Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections

7

-

20

Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

7

-

22

Part E: Maintenance Record

7-

7-1

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your

Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your dealer

for details.

yellow blue

Introduction

Your Vehicle and the Environment

Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.

7-2

How This Section is Organized

This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:

“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows what to have done and how often. Some of these services can be complex, so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should let your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs.

CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know

how and the proper tools and equipment for the job.

If you have any doubt, have a qualified technician do the work.

yellow blue

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.

“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains important inspections that your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center should perform.

“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists some recommended products to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done.

“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place for you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be sure to write it down in this part. This will help you determine when your next maintenance should be done.

In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.

If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle, you will probably want to get the service information. See “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.

7-3

Part A: Scheduled Maintenance

Services

Using Your Maintenance Schedule

We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.

You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.

This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them. If you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know that GM

trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in

Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

D carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s

Tire

-

Loading Information label. See “Loading Your

Vehicle” in the Index.

D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.

D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.

yellow blue

7-4

yellow blue

Scheduled Maintenance

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles

(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles

(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).

See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic

Maintenance Inspections” following.

Footnotes

[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the

California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.

* Your vehicle has an Engine Oil Life Monitor. This monitor will show you when to change the engine oil and filter

--

usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and

7,500 miles (12 500 km) since your last oil change.

Under severe conditions, the indicator may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months without an oil and filter change.

The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the CHANGE

OIL SOON light comes on. Remember to reset the Oil

Life Monitor whenever the oil is changed. For more information, see “Change Oil Soon Light” in the Index.

+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic

Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.

7-5

Scheduled Maintenance

7,500 Miles (12 500 km)

j Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)

j Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote

[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

22,500 Miles (37 500 km)

j Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-6

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

yellow blue

yellow blue

Scheduled Maintenance

30,000 Miles (50 000 km)

j Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) j Replace air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service. j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote

[.) j For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended

Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote

[.)

37,500 Miles (62 500 km)

j Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-7

Scheduled Maintenance

45,000 Miles (75 000 km)

j Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote

[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

50,000 Miles (83 000 km)

j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90

_F

(32

_C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid

and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

yellow blue

7-8

yellow blue

Scheduled Maintenance

52,500 Miles (87 500 km)

j Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

60,000 Miles (100 000 km)

j Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended

Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote

[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.

An Emission Control Service. j Replace air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service.

(Continued)

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

SERVICED BY:

7-9

Scheduled Maintenance

60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued)

j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote

[.)

67,500 Miles (112 500 km)

j Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

75,000 Miles (125 000 km)

j Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote

[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

yellow blue

7-10

yellow blue

Scheduled Maintenance

82,500 Miles (137 500 km)

j Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)

j Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Replace air cleaner filter.

An Emission Control Service. j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote

[.) j For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended

Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote

[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-11

Scheduled Maintenance

97,500 Miles (162 500 km)

j Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.

See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

100,000 Miles (166 000 km)

j Inspect spark plug wires.

An Emission Control Service. j Replace spark plugs.

An Emission Control Service.

j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90

_F

(32

_C) or higher.

– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

– When doing frequent trailer towing.

– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transaxle fluid, change both the fluid and filter.

7-12

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

yellow blue

yellow blue

Scheduled Maintenance

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)

j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.

Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.

An Emission Control Service.

DATE

ACTUAL

MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-13

Part B: Owner Checks and Services

Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.

Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in

Part D.

At Each Fuel Fill

It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for further details.

Engine Coolant Level Check

Check the engine coolant level and add DEX

-

COOL

R coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for further details.

yellow blue

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check

Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index for further details.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation Check

Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.

See “Tires” in the Index for further details.

Cassette Deck Service

Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every

50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index for further details.

7-14

At Least Twice a Year

Restraint System Check

Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)

Wiper Blade Check

Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,

Cleaning” in the Index.

Weatherstrip Lubrication

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)

yellow blue

Automatic Transaxle Check

Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See

“Automatic Transaxle Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed.

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders Service

Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D.

Body Lubrication Service

Lubricate all hood hinges, hood latch assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, door hinges, rear compartment, glove box door, console door and any folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.

7-15

Starter Switch Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking

Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake.

NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).

If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service.

yellow blue

Brake

-

Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary).

NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of

PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service.

7-16

Ignition Transaxle Lock Check

While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.

D The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).

D The key should come out only in LOCK.

Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK (P)

Mechanism Check

CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.

yellow blue

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.

D To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.

D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:

With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then release all brakes.

Underbody Flushing Service

At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect.

7-17

Part C: Periodic Maintenance

Inspections

Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s

service department or other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.

Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner

Publications” in the Index.

Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle

Boot and Seal Inspection

Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook

up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary.

yellow blue

Exhaust System Inspection

Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missing or out

of

position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build

up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

Engine Cooling System Inspection

Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.

7-18

Throttle System Inspection

Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables.

yellow blue

Brake System Inspection

Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook

up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking.

7-19

Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may be obtained from your dealer.

USAGE

Engine Oil

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Engine Oil with the American

Petroleum Institute Certified For

Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol of the proper viscosity. To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see

“Engine Oil” in the Index.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only GM

Goodwrench

R

DEX

Havoline

R

DEX

-

-

COOL

COOL

R

R

or

Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index.

USAGE

Hydraulic Brake

System

Windshield

Washer Solvent

Power Steering

System

Automatic

Transaxle

Key Lock

Cylinders

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Delco Supreme 11

R

Brake Fluid

(GM Part No. 12377967 or equivalent DOT

-

3 Brake Fluid).

GM Optikleen

R

Washer Solvent

(GM Part No. 1051515) or equivalent.

GM Power Steering Fluid (GM

Part No. 1052884

-

1 pint,

1050017

-

1 quart, or equivalent).

DEXRON

R

-

III Automatic

Transmission Fluid.

Multi

-

Purpose Lubricant,

Superlube

R

(GM Part

No. 12346241 or equivalent).

yellow blue

7-20

USAGE

Supercharger

Hood Latch

Assembly,

Secondary Latch,

Pivots, Spring

Anchor and

Release Pawl

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Supercharger Oil (GM Part

No. 12345982). See “Supercharger

Oil” in the Index.

Lubriplate

R

Lubricant Aerosol

(GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2,

Category LB or GC

-

LB.

yellow blue

USAGE

Hood and Door

Hinges

Weatherstrip

Conditioning

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Multi

-

Purpose Lubricant,

Superlube

R

(GM Part

No. 12346241 or equivalent).

Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM

Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).

7-21

Part E: Maintenance Record

After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.

Any additional information from “Owner Checks and

Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.

Maintenance Record

DATE

ODOMETER

READING

SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

yellow blue

7-22

DATE

ODOMETER

READING

Maintenance Record

SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

yellow blue

7-23

DATE

ODOMETER

READING

Maintenance Record

SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

yellow blue

7-24

yellow blue

Section 8 Customer Assistance Information

8

-

2

8

-

3

8

-

3

8

-

5

8

-

5

8

-

7

8

-

8

8

-

9

Here you will find out how to contact Pontiac if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects.

Pontiac Cares

What Makes Up Pontiac Cares?

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users

Customer Assistance Offices

GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities

Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program

Canadian Roadside Assistance

8

-

10

Courtesy Transportation

8

-

11

Warranty Information

8

-

12

Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government

8

-

12

Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government

8

-

13

Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors

8

-

13

Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada

8-

8-1

Pontiac Cares

With PONTIAC CARES, you are never more than a phone call away from having your concern taken care of.

8-2

yellow blue

The PONTIAC CARES philosophy and elements are designed to make you realize that Pontiac recognizes you as a valuable customer, appreciates your purchase decision, and is dedicated to taking care of the most important person ... YOU! PONTIAC CARES is: A valuable feature that comes with every Pontiac, a feature that offers a multitude of benefits that can give you safety, security, comfort and convenience.

What Makes Up Pontiac Cares?

D A 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) Bumper to

Bumper Warranty

D Customer Assistance

D Roadside Assistance

D Courtesy Transportation

All of these elements combine to make your driving experience an enjoyable one and are discussed in greater detail in your owner’s manual. Pontiac is focusing on the changing needs of our customers and is committed to giving you an exceptional level of customer care throughout your ownership experience. Our goal is to create total customer enthusiasm in our product and our services and make you the most satisfied customer in the world.

yellow blue

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

8-3

Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.

Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling

1-800-PM-CARES (1-800-762-2737). In Canada, contact

GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in

Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or

1-800-263-7854 (French).

yellow blue

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the following information available to give the Customer

Assistance Representative:

D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.)

D Dealership name and location

D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you must file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle

Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

8-4

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing any court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB using the toll

free telephone number or write them at the following address:

BBB Auto Line

Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.

4200 Wilson Boulevard

Suite 800

Arlington, VA 22203

-

1804

Telephone: 1

-

800

-

955

-

5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.

yellow blue

Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users

To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech

impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),

Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer

Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with

Pontiac by dialing: 1

-

800

-

833

-

PONT. (TTY users in

Canada can dial 1

-

800

-

263

-

3830.)

Customer Assistance Offices

Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to

Pontiac, the letter should be addressed to Pontiac’s

Customer Assistance Center.

United States

Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center

P.O. Box 436008

Pontiac, MI 48343-6008

1-800-PM-CARES (1-800-762-2737)

1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE

8-5

Canada

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)

1-800-263-7854 (French)

1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

GMODC

-

Customer Communication Centre 169-007

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 905-644-4112

Fax: 905-644-4866

Caribbean Numbers

1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico

1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico

1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic

1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic

1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands

1-800-389-0009 Bahamas

1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I.

If toll-free service is not available in the Caribbean, call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315.

yellow blue

8-6

GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities

This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle (hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.).

yellow blue

This program can also provide you with free resource information, such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers. The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1

Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1

-

800

-

323

-

9935.

-

800

-

833

-

9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call

1

-

800

-

GM

-

DRIVE (463

-

7483) for details. TTY users call 1

-

800

-

263

-

3830. When calling from the United

States, please dial 1

-

905

-

644

-

3063.

8-7

Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program

Security While You Travel

1

-

800

-

ROADSIDE (1

-

800

-

762

-

3743)

As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside

yellow blue

Assistance program. This value

added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road.

Pontiac’s Roadside Assistance toll

free number is staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing minor repair information over the phone or making arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest

Pontiac dealer.

We will provide the following services for

3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you:

D Fuel delivery

D Keys locked in vehicle

D Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service

D Change a flat tire

D Jump starts

D Courtesy Transportation -- See Courtesy

Transportation section for details

8-8

We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers of the following additional services depending on your needs:

D Hotels

D Glass replacement

D Tire repair facilities

D Rental vehicle or taxis

D Airports or train stations

D Police, fire department or hospitals

In many instances, mechanical failures are covered under Pontiac’s comprehensive warranty. However, when other services are utilized, our advisors will explain any payment obligations you might incur.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please provide the following information to give the advisor:

D Location of vehicle

D Telephone number of your location

D Vehicle model, year and color

D Mileage of vehicle

D Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

D Vehicle license plate number

yellow blue

Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Pontiac’s judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.

While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service, it is added security while traveling for you and your family. Remember, we’re only a phone call away.

Pontiac Roadside Assistance

--

1

-

800

-

ROADSIDE or 1

-

800

-

762

-

3743.

Canadian Roadside Assistance

Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive

Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call

1

-

800

-

268

-

6800 for emergency services.

8-9

Courtesy Transportation

Pontiac has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealerships are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.

Plan Ahead When Possible

When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should contact your dealer and request an appointment.

By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If it is determined that your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately and is still operative, you are encouraged to drive the vehicle until scheduling can be accomplished.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

8-10

yellow blue

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait Pontiac helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Participating dealerships can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.

Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum) may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to

$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.

Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a maximum of

$30.00 per day supported by receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements.

Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like

vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional Program Information

Courtesy Transportation is available during the

Bumper

to

-

Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner Assistance

Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealerships and all program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.

yellow blue

Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the

Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General

Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, alternative transportation may be available under the

Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.

General Motors and participating dealerships reserve the right to deny a rental vehicle to anyone not possessing a valid motor vehicle operators license in their name, anyone who is under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or anyone whose mental or physical abilities are impaired so as to be unable to operate a motor vehicle safely.

Warranty Information

Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information.

8-11

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

TO THE UNITED STATES

GOVERNMENT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or

General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll

free at 1

-

800

-

424

-

9393 (or 366

-

0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation

Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

TO THE CANADIAN

GOVERNMENT

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify

Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General

Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada

330 Sparks Street

Tower C

Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

yellow blue

8-12

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

TO GENERAL MOTORS

In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1

-

800

-

PM

-

CARES, or write:

Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center

P.O. Box 436008

Pontiac, MI 48343-6008

In Canada, please call us at 1

-

800

-

263

-

3777 (English) or 1

-

800

-

263

-

7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

yellow blue

Ordering Service and Owner

Publications in Canada

Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service literature are available for purchase for all current and past model General Motors vehicles.

The toll-free telephone number for ordering information in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.

8-13

yellow blue

1999 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION

The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order, or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)

CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1999 PONTIAC

SERVICE MANUALS

Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00

OWNER’S INFORMATION

Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance

Schedule for all models.

TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE

UNIT REPAIR MANUAL

This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments and specifications for the

1999 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and

Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $10.00

SERVICE BULLETINS

Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.

Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS

Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON

THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:

Helm, Incorporated

S

P.O. Box 07130

S

Detroit, MI 48207

8-14

OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123

Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)

9

9

1

9

yellow blue

ORDER TOLL FREE

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)

1-800-551-4123

(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)

FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927

Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call

1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied against the original order.

ITEM DESCRIPTION

VEHICLE MODEL

NAME YEAR

QTY.

PRICE

EACH*

TOTAL

PRICE

1999 $90.00

Service Manual

Car & Light Truck

Transmission Unit Repair

1999 $50.00

Owner’s Manual In Portfolio 1999 $15.00

Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio 1999 $10.00

G

M

S

H

I

P

T

O

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.

Mail completed order form to:

HELM, INCORPORATED

S

P.O. Box 07130

S

Detroit, MI 48207

For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.

(CUSTOMER’S NAME)

(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)

(CITY)

(ATTENTION)

DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.

GM-PON-ORD99

(ZIP CODE) (STATE)

( )

AREA CODE

*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)

P

A

Y

M

E

N

T

Check or Money

Order payable to

Helm, Inc. (USA funds only — do not send cash.)

MasterCard

VISA

Discover

Account

Number:

Expiration

Date mo/yr:

TOTAL MATERIAL

Michigan Purchasers add 6% sales tax

U.S. Order Processing

Canadian Postage

(See Note Below)

GRAND TOTAL

$5.00

Check here if your billing address is different from your shipping address shown.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents

U.S. order processing.

NOTES

8-16

yellow blue

yellow blue

Section 9 Index

A

ccessory Power Outlet

Add

-

On Electrical Equipment

Air Bag

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

-

26, 6

-

60

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How Does it Restrain

How it Works

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

64

1

-

22

1

-

26

1

-

24

1

-

24

Location

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Readiness Light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

-

24, 2

-

71

Servicing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What Makes it Inflate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What Will You See After it Inflates

When Should it Inflate

Air Cleaner/Filter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

28

1

-

26

1

-

27

1

-

26

6

-

20

Air Conditioning

Automatic and Auxiliary Temperature Control

Automatic Control

Electronic Controls

. . . . . . .

Manual Control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air Conditioning Refrigerants

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

-

68

Alignment and Balance, Tire

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning

Antenna

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Backglass

Fixed Mast

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

-

4

3

-

5

3

-

2

3

-

6

6

-

48

6

-

56

3

-

28

3

-

29

3

-

28

6

-

26

Antifreeze

Anti

-

Lock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake System Warning Light

Brakes

9-

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

73, 4

-

7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

-

7

Anti

-

Lockout Feature

Anti

-

Theft, Radio

Appearance Care

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

7

3

-

22

6

-

51

6

-

58

Appearance Care Materials

Arbitration Program

Arming

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

-

4

2

-

25

Confirmation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Lock Switch

Armrest, Rear Storage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

25

2

-

24

2

-

25

2

-

61

2

-

62

3

-

25

Audio Controls, Steering Wheel

Audio Equipment, Adding

Audio Systems

Automatic

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

-

26

3

-

10

Control, Climate Control System

Door Locks

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Park Mechanism Check

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

6

7

-

17

Automatic Transaxle

2

-

6

3

-

5

Check

Fluid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Average Econ Message

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

-

15

6

-

22

2

-

32

2

-

90

B

attery

Jump Starting

Replacement, Remote Keyless Entry

Saver

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

35

5

-

3

2

-

10

2

-

56

9-1

Battery (Continued)

Warnings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BBB Auto Line

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before Leaving On A Long Trip

Better Business Bureau Mediation

Blizzard

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Boost Gage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

-

3

8

4

-

23

8

-

4

-

4

4

-

29

2

-

91

Brake

Adjustment

Fluid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Master Cylinder

Parking

Pedal Travel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing System Parts

System Warning Light

Trailer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transaxle Shift Interlock Check

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

6

-

34

6

-

32

6

-

32

2

-

36

6

-

34

6

-

35

2

-

72

4

-

37

-

40, 7

-

16

Wear

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brakes, Anti

-

Lock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Braking

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Braking in Emergencies

Break

-

In, New Vehicle

Brightness Control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

34

4

-

7

4

-

6

4

-

11

BTSI Check

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2

-

26

2

-

54

-

40, 7

-

16

Bulb Replacement

Center High

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Mounted Stoplamp

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Turn Signal

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Headlamps

Taillamp

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

36

6

-

39

6

-

38

6

-

36

6

-

40

C

anada, Ordering Service and Owner Publications

Canadian Roadside Assistance

Capacities and Specifications

Carbon Monoxide

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

. . . 8

6

-

-

14

8

-

9

66

-

22, 2

-

43, 4

-

30, 4

-

37

9-2

yellow blue

Cassette Deck Service

Cassette Tape Player

Care

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

-

14

3

-

10

3

-

27

3

-

12

Errors

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CD Adapter Kits

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Center Console Storage

Center High

-

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement

. . . .

3

-

13

2

6

-

-

61

39

Center Passenger Position

Certification/Tire Label

Chains, Safety

Chains, Tire

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Change Oil Soon Light

Changing a Flat Tire

Charging System

Where to Put

Circuit Breakers and Fuses

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking Your Restraint Systems

Chemical Paint Spotting

Child Restraints

Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position

Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position

Securing in the Right Front Seat Position

Top Strap

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cigarette Lighter

Cleaner, Air

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

57

1

-

38

1

-

44

1

-

46

1

-

48

1

-

43

1

-

42

2

-

62

6

-

60

6

-

20

1

-

29

4

-

32

4

-

37

6

-

50

2

-

87

5

-

22

2

-

71

1

-

53

Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Fabric

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Glass Surfaces

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inside of Your Vehicle

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior Plastic Components

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Leather

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

56

6

-

55

6

-

51

6

-

54

6

-

51

6

-

53

6

-

53

6

-

53

Outside of Your Vehicle

Special Problems

Stains

Tires

Vinyl

Wheels

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield and Wiper Blades

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

55

6

-

52

6

-

51

6

-

56

6

-

53

6

-

56

6

-

54

3

-

10

Clock, Setting the

Column Shift

Comfort Controls

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compact Disc Care

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

-

28

Compact Disc Player

2

-

37

3

-

2

Care

Errors

Trunk

Console Shift

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

-

14, 3

-

16

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Mounted CD Changer

Compact Spare Tire

3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

-

28

-

15, 3

-

17

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Console Storage, Center

Content Theft

Arming Confirmation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Deterrent System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Arming with the Power Lock Switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

-

19

5

-

32

2

-

38

2

-

61

2

-

24

2

-

25

2

-

24

Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter

. . 2

Disarming with the Key

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

25

-

25

Disarming with the Remote Keyless

Entry Transmitter

Nuisance Alarms

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

25

2

-

25

Control

Loss Of

Vehicle

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Convenience Net

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Convex Outside Mirror

Coolant

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

16

4

-

5

2

-

62

2

-

58

6

-

26

6

-

28

yellow blue

Checking

Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heater, Engine

Recovery Tank

What to Use

Cooling System

Courtesy Lamps

Cruise Control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speech Impaired

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Temperature Gage

Customer Assistance

Hearing Impaired

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Courtesy Transportation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Text Telephone Users

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

28

2

-

30

5

-

14

2

-

80

6

-

27

5

-

12

2

-

54

8

-

10

2

-

49

8

-

1

8

-

5

8

-

1

8

-

5

8

-

5

8

-

3

D

amage

Finish

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sheet Metal

Dead Battery

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Daytime Running Lamps

Defects, Reporting Safety

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

57

6

-

57

6

-

57

-

52

5

-

3

8

-

12

Defensive Driving

Defrosting

Delayed Illumination

DIC

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Defogger, Rear Window

Defogging

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

4

-

2

3

-

8

3

-

8

Dimensions, Vehicle

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Disabilities, GM Mobility Program for Persons

Disarming with the Key

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

-

8

2

-

55

2

-

86

6

-

68

Disarming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter

. 2

Dolby B Noise Reduction

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

-

7

2

-

25

3

-

25

-

13

9-3

Door

Ajar Light

Locks

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

87, 2

-

91

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drive, Automatic Transaxle

Driver Information Center

English/Metric Button

Mode Button

Reset Button

Driver Position

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

4

2

-

34

2

-

86

2

-

90

2

-

90

2

-

90

1

-

13

Driving

City

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Defensive

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

21

Drunken

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

2

4

-

3

4

-

22

Freeway

In Foreign Countries

In the Rain

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

5

4

-

18

Night

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

On Curves

On Grades While Towing a Trailer

On Hill and Mountain Roads

On Snow and Ice

Through Water

Wet Roads

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

17

4

-

12

4

-

39

4

-

25

4

-

28

4

-

21

4

-

18

4

-

27

Winter

DRL

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

With a Trailer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drunken Driving

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

37

2

-

52

4

-

3

E

lectrical Equipment, Adding

Electrical System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirror

Engine

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air Cleaner/Filter

Coolant

3

-

26, 6

-

60

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

2

-

-

60

57

-

10, 6

-

11, 6

-

12

6

-

20

6

-

26

9-4

yellow blue

Coolant Heater

Exhaust

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coolant Level Check

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coolant Temperature Gage

Coolant Temperature Light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2

-

30

7

-

14

2

-

80

2

-

79

-

22, 2

-

43, 4

-

30

Fuse Block (Passenger’s Side)

Identification

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Oil Level Check

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

63

6

-

59

7

-

14

5

-

9

Overheated Protection Operating Mode

Overheating

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Running While Parked

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

-

9

2

-

44

Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting Your

Supercharged

Additives

Checking

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing

Engine Oil

Adding

Used

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What Kind to Use

When to Change

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

67

2

-

28

6

-

13

4

-

40

6

-

13

6

-

15

6

-

19

6

-

14

6

-

19

6

-

16

6

-

19

6

-

5

Ethanol

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exhaust, Engine

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

22, 2

-

43, 4

-

30

Exit Lighting

Express

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Open Sunroof

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exterior Lamps

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

55

2

-

65

2

-

51

F

abric Cleaning

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

Filling Your Tank

Filter, Air

Finish Care

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

51

6

-

8

6

-

6

6

-

20

6

-

55

Finish Damage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

First Gear, Automatic Transaxle

Flashers, Hazard Warning

Flash

to

-

Pass Feature

Flat, If a Tire Goes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

57

2

-

35

5

-

2

2

-

47

5

-

21

5

-

22

Flat Tire, Changing

Fluid Capacities

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fluids and Lubricants

Fog Lamps

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Foreign Countries, Fuel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

66

7

-

20

2

-

53

6

-

5

French Language Manual

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

Front Turn Signal Bulb Replacement

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

-

38

Fuel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Canada

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Filling a Portable Container

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

3

6

-

5

6

-

8

6

-

6

Filling Your Tank

Gage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

In Foreign Countries

Low Light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel Used Message

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

80

6

-

5

2

-

81

2

-

90

6

-

60

G

ages

Boost

Engine Coolant Temperature

Fuel

Garage Door Opener

GAWR

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

91

2

-

80

2

-

80

2

-

59

4

-

32

2

-

32

Gear Positions, Automatic Transaxle

Glove Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities

Graphic Equalizer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gross Axle Weight Rating

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

59

8

-

7

3

-

16

4

-

32

yellow blue

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

-

32

Guide en Français

GVWR

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

-

32

H

alogen Bulbs

Hazard Warning Flashers

Head Restraints

Headlamps

Wiring

Head

Head

High

-

Heated Seat

Heating

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Up Display

Hitches, Trailer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bulb Replacement

-

Beam Headlamps

Highway Hypnosis

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hill and Mountain Roads

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

High/Low Beam Changer

-

Up Display, Care of

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

36

5

-

2

4

1

-

6

2

-

51

6

-

36

2

-

47

6

-

60

2

-

82

2

-

84

8

-

5

1

-

4

3

-

8

2

-

47

-

24

4

-

25

4

-

37

Hood

Checking Things Under

Release

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Horn, Full Floating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

45

HUD

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hydroplaning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

8

6

-

9

2

-

82

4

-

20

I

gnition Positions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition Transaxle Lock Check

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Illuminated Entry

Inflation, Tire

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

26

7

-

17

2

-

54

6

-

44

2

-

57

9-5

I nstrument Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brightness Control

Cleaning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cluster

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuse Block

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior Lamps

Inspections

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine Cooling System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exhaust Systems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Drive Axle Boot

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Drive Axle Seal

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inspections (Continued)

Suspension

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Throttle System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

66

2

-

54

6

-

53

2

-

68

6

-

61

2

-

54

7

-

19

7

-

18

7

-

18

7

-

18

7

-

18

7

-

18

7

-

18

7

-

19

J

ack, Tire

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jump Starting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Key in the Ignition

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

-

24

5

-

3

2

-

23

K

ey Lock Cylinders Service

Key Reminder Warning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

-

15

2

-

27

Keyless Entry

Operation

Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery Replacement

Resynchronization

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

9

2

-

10

2

-

10

2

-

11

2

-

2

L

abels

Certification/Tire

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Parts Identification

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

32

6

-

59

9-6

yellow blue

Tire

-

Loading Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle Identification Number

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

32

6

-

59

Lamps

Courtesy

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Delayed Illumination

Exit Lighting

Exterior

Interior

Reading

Latches, Seatback

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

54

2

-

13

2

-

13

2

-

51

2

-

54

2

-

56

1

-

6

2

-

7

Leaving Your Vehicle

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running

. . . . . . . 2

-

39

Lighter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

62

Lights

Air Bag Readiness

Anti

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Lock Brake System Warning

. . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

24, 2

-

71

Brake System Warning

Change Oil Soon

Charging System

Door Ajar

2

-

73, 4

-

7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

72

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2

-

87

2

-

71

-

87, 2

-

91

2

-

79

Engine Coolant Temperature

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enhanced Traction System Warning

. . . . . . . . . 2

-

74, 4

-

10

Interior

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Low Coolant Warning

Low Fuel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

54

2

-

80

2

-

81

2

-

79

Low Oil Level

Low Trac

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

74, 2

-

87, 2

-

91

Low Traction

Oil Warning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Performance Shift

2

-

74, 4

-

10

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety Belt Reminder

1

2

-

78

2

-

90

-

9, 2

-

70

Service Engine Soon

TCS Off

Trac Off

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

2

2

-

75

-

73, 2

-

91

-

74, 2

-

87, 2

-

91

Traction Control System Warning

Trunk Ajar

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

73, 4

-

9

2

-

87, 2

-

91

Washer Fluid Low

Loading Your Vehicle

Lockout Prevention

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

87, 2

-

90

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

32

Locks

Anti

Door

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Lockout Feature

Automatic Door

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition Transaxle Lock Check

2

-

7

2

-

4

2

-

7

2

-

6

2

-

4

7

-

17

Key Lock Cylinder Service

Last Door Closed

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lockout Prevention

Power Door

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear Door Security

Trunk

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

-

15

2

-

6

2

-

7

2

-

5

2

-

7

2

-

22

Locks and Lighting Choices

Low Coolant Warning Light

Low Oil Level Light

Low Trac Light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lubricants and Fluids

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lubrication Service, Body

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

12

2

-

80

-

74, 2

-

87, 2

-

91

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

79

7

-

20

7

-

15

M

aintenance, Normal Replacement Parts

Maintenance Record

Maintenance Schedule

Owner Checks and Services

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

68

-

22

7

-

1

7

-

14

Periodic Maintenance Inspections

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Scheduled Maintenance Services

Maintenance, Underbody

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance When Trailer Towing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

-

18

7

-

20

7

-

4

6

-

57

4

-

40

yellow blue

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

75

Manual

Control, Climate Control System

Front Seat

Lumbar

Methanol

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

-

6

1

-

2

1

-

3

6

-

5

2

-

57

Mirrors

Convex Outside

Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview

Inside Day/Night Rearview

Power Remote Control

Visor Vanity

MMT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mountain Roads

2

-

58

2

-

57

2

-

57

2

-

58

2

-

63

6

-

4

4

-

25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multifunction Alarm Locks and Lighting Choices

Arming and Disarming the Content Theft

-

. . . . .

Deterrent . .

2

2

-

-

12

20

Automatic Door Locks

Content Theft

-

Deterrent

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Delayed Illumination/Exit Lighting

Entering Programming Mode

Exiting Programming Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Last Door Closed and Lockout Prevention

Remote Driver’s Unlock Control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote Lock/Unlock Confirmation

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

14

2

-

19

2

-

13

2

-

13

2

-

13

2

-

15

2

-

16

2

-

17

N

et, Convenience

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Neutral, Automatic Transaxle

New Vehicle Break

-

In

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Night Vision

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Nuisance Alarms

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

62

2

-

33

2

-

26

4

-

17

6

-

68

2

-

25

9-7

O

dometer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Odometer, Trip

Off

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Road Recovery

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

69

2

-

69

4

-

14

Oil

Engine

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Life Message

Supercharger

OnStar

R

System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overhead Console

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode

Overheating Engine

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Owner Checks and Services

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Owner Publications, Ordering

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

13

2

-

90

6

-

21

2

-

78

2

-

64

2

-

59

5

-

9

5

-

9

7

-

14

8

-

14

P

aint Spotting, Chemical

Park

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

-

57

Automatic Transaxle

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shifting Into

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shifting Out of

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parking

2

-

32

2

2

-

37

-

40

At Night

Brake

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake Mechanism Check

Lots

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Over Things That Burn

With a Trailer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Passenger Position

Passing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Passing, Trailer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Performance Shift Light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Performance Shifting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Periodic Maintenance Inspections

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

23

2

-

36

7

-

17

2

-

23

2

-

43

4

-

39

1

-

22

4

-

14

4

-

38

2

-

90

2

-

35

7

-

18

9-8

yellow blue

Pontiac Cares Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

-

2

Power

Accessory Outlet

Door Locks

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

64

2

-

5

2

-

85

Drop Feature

Four

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Way Lumbar Driver’s Seat

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Option Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote Control Mirror

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

4

6

-

60

2

-

58

2

-

27

Retained Accessory

Six

-

Way Seat

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering

Steering Fluid

Windows

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

3

4

-

12

6

-

29

2

-

45

Power Steering Fluid

How to Check

What to Use

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When to Check

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts

Problems on the Road

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Publications, Service and Owner

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

30

6

-

30

6

-

29

1

-

21

5

-

1

8

-

14

R

adiator

Radiator Pressure Cap

Radio Reception

Radios

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rain, Driving In

Range Message

Reading Lamps

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

-

10, 3

-

14, 3

-

16

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

-

16

6

-

25

3

-

26

4

-

18

2

-

90

2

-

56

Rear

Door Security Locks

Outside Seat Position

Safety Belt Comfort Guides

Seat Passengers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

7

1

-

30

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

33

1

-

30

Window Defogger

Rear Armrest, Storage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

-

8

2

-

61

Rearview Mirror

Electrochromic Day/Night

Inside Day/Night

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reclining Front Seatbacks

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

57

2

-

57

1

-

5

7

-

20

Recovery Tank, Coolant

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Recreational Vehicle Towing

Refrigerants, Air Conditioning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

-

14

4

-

31

6

-

68

Remote

Keyless Entry

Trunk Release

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

8

2

-

22

Replacement

Bulbs

Parts

Wheel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash

Replacing Safety Belts

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reporting Safety Defects

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

66

6

-

68

6

-

49

1

-

53

1

-

53

8

-

12

Restraints

Checking

Child

Head

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing Parts After a Crash

1

-

53

1

-

38

1

-

6

1

-

53

System Check

Top Strap

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Resynchronization, Keyless Entry Transmitter

Retained Accessory Power

Reverse, Automatic Transaxle

Right Front Passenger Position

Roadside Assistance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Roadside Assistance, Canadian

Rocking Your Vehicle

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

-

15

1

-

43

2

-

11

2

-

27

2

-

33

1

-

22

8

-

8

8

-

9

5

-

34

yellow blue

Rotation, Tires

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

-

45

S

afety Belt Extender

Safety Belts

Adults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

53

1

-

7

1

-

13

Care

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Center Passenger Position

Children

Driver Position

Extender

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to Wear Properly

Incorrect Usage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

6

-

54

1

-

29

1

-

35

1

-

13

1

-

53

1

-

13

-

17, 1

-

51, 1

-

52

Lap Belt

Lap

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Shoulder

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

29

1

-

13, 1

-

30

Larger Children

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Questions and Answers

Rear Comfort Guides

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

. . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

50

1

-

12

1

-

33

1

-

30

1

-

30

Rear Seat Passengers

Reminder Light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

-

9, 2

-

63

Replacing After a Crash

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Right Front Passenger Position

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

Smaller Children and Babies

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

53

1

-

22

1

-

16

1

-

35

1

-

21

Use During Pregnancy

Warning Light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

-

8, 2

-

70

Why They Work

Safety Chains

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

9

4

-

37

Safety Defects, Reporting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

-

12

Safety Warnings and Symbols

Scheduled Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

iii

-

5

Seatback Latches

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seatback, Reclining Front

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

6

1

-

5

9-9

Seats

Heated

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Front

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Lumbar

Power Four

Restraint Systems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Way Lumbar, Driver’s

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

4

1

-

2

1

-

3

1

-

4

1

-

1

1

-

2

Seat Controls

Six

-

Way Power

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Securing a Child Restraint

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

44

1

-

3

2

-

34

Second Gear, Automatic Transaxle

Service

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bulletins, Ordering

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

2

8

-

14

Manuals, Ordering

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

-

14

6

-

59

Parts Identification Label

Publications, Ordering

Work, Doing Your Own

Service and Appearance Care

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service and Owner Publications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

-

14

6

-

2

6

-

1

8

-

13

Service Engine Soon Light

Service Publications

Sheet Metal Damage

Shift Lock Release

Shifting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Servicing Your Air Bag

-

Equipped Vehicle

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Transaxle

Column

Console

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Into PARK (P)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Out of PARK (P)

Performance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

Signaling Turns

Skidding

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sound Equipment, Adding

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

38

2

-

37

2

-

40

2

-

35

1

-

16

2

-

47

4

-

16

3

-

26

2

-

75

8

-

14

1

-

28

6

-

57

2

-

40

2

-

32

2

-

32

2

-

37

9-10

yellow blue

Spare Tire, Compact

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifications and Capacities

Specifications, Engine

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speech Impaired, Customer Assistance

Speedometer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

-

32

6

-

66

6

-

67

8

-

5

2

-

69

SRS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stains, Cleaning

Starter Switch Check

Starting Your Engine

Steam

Steering

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio Wheel Controls

In Emergencies

Power

Tips

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheel, Tilt

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storage Compartments

Center Console

Garage Door Opener

Overhead Console

Rear Armrest

Sunglasses

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storage, Vehicle

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

12

4

-

12

2

-

46

2

-

59

2

-

61

2

-

59

2

-

59

2

-

61

2

-

59

6

-

35

1

-

22

6

-

51

7

-

16

2

-

28

5

-

10

4

-

12

3

-

25

4

-

13

Storing

Flat Tire and Tools

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Spare Tire and Tools

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sun Visors

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sunglasses Storage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sunroof

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Supercharged Engine

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Supercharger Oil

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Supplemental Restraint System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

-

30

5

-

31

5

-

33

2

-

63

2

-

59

2

-

65

6

-

13

6

-

21

1

-

22

Symbols, Vehicle

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v

T

achometer

Taillamp Bulb Replacement

Tape Player Care

TCS Off Light

TCS Switch

Theft

Theft

-

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

73, 2

-

91

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deterrent Alarm System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Theft

-

Deterrent Feature

THEFTLOCK t

Thermostat

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Third Position, Automatic Transaxle

Tilt Wheel

Time, Setting the

Tire Chains

Tire Loading

Tires

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alignment and Balance

Buying New

Chains

Traction

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing a Flat

Cleaning

Treadwear

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compact Spare

Inflation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inflation Check

Inspection and Rotation

Loading

Pressure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Temperature

Wear Indicators

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Information Label

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Uniform Quality Grading

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheel Replacement

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

69

6

-

40

3

-

27

6

-

56

5

-

32

6

-

44

7

-

14

6

-

45

4

-

32

4

-

32

6

-

44

6

-

48

6

-

48

6

-

48

6

-

47

6

-

46

6

-

49

3

-

10

6

-

50

4

-

32

6

-

43

6

-

48

6

-

46

6

-

50

5

-

22

2

-

91

2

-

23

2

-

24

3

-

22

3

-

22

6

-

25

2

-

34

2

-

46

yellow blue

When It’s Time for New

Top Strap

Torque

Lock

Wheel Nut

Towing

Trailer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Your Vehicle

Trac Off Light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Recreational Vehicle

Trac Switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

74, 2

-

87, 2

-

91

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

46

1

-

43

2

-

39

2

-

39

5

-

30

4

-

31

4

-

31

4

-

34

5

-

8

2

-

87, 2

-

91

Traction

Control System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control System Warning Light

2

4

-

9

-

73, 4

-

9

Enhanced System Warning Light

Low Light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

74, 4

-

10

2

-

74, 4

-

10

Trailer

Backing Up

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brakes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving on Grades

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving with

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine Cooling When Towing

Following Distance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hitches

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance When Towing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Making Turns

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parking on Hills

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Passing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety Chains

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tongue Weight

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Total Weight on Tires

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Turn Signals

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Weight

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

38

4

-

39

4

-

38

4

-

37

4

-

36

4

-

36

4

-

34

4

-

39

4

-

35

4

-

38

4

-

37

4

-

39

4

-

37

4

-

40

4

-

38

4

-

37

4

-

40

9-11

Transaxle Fluid, Automatic

Transmitters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Matching to Your Vehicle

Remote Keyless Entry

Resynchronization

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

22

2

-

10

2

-

10

2

-

8

2

-

11

Transportation, Courtesy

Trip

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before Leaving On A Long

Computer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

8

-

10

2

-

69

4

-

23

-

88, 2

-

89

Odometer

Trunk

Lock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Access Panel

Ajar Light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

87, 2

-

91

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mounted CD Changer

Release, Remote

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

69

2

-

22

2

-

61

2

-

22

3

-

19

2

-

22

8

-

5

TTY Users

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Turn and Lane Change Signals

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

47

Turn Signal on Chime

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

47

2

-

46

4

-

39

U

nderbody Flushing Service

Underbody Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Underhood Electrical Center (Passenger’s Side)

. . . . . . .

7

-

17

6

-

57

6

-

63

V

ehicle

Control

Damage Warnings

Dimensions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

iv

-

68

Identification Number

Loading

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

5

6

-

59

4

-

32

9-12

yellow blue

Recreational Towing

Storage

Ventilation System

Visor Vanity Mirrors

Visors, Sun

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

31

6

-

35

3

-

9

2

-

63

2

-

63

W

arning Devices

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators

Warranty Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

-

2

2

-

70

8

-

11

Washer Fluid

Low Light

Windshield

Washing Your Vehicle

Weatherstrips

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

87, 2

-

90

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

31

6

-

55

6

-

55

Wheel

Alignment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Nut Torque

Replacement

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wrench

Windows

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windows, Power

Windshield Washer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fluid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fluid Level Check

Windshield Wipers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Blade Cleaning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Blade Replacement

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuses

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Winter Driving

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wiper Blade Check

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wiper Blades, Cleaning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wiring, Headlamp

Wrench, Wheel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

-

14

2

-

48

6

-

42

6

-

42

6

-

60

4

-

27

7

-

15

7

-

15

6

-

60

5

-

24

6

-

48

5

-

30

6

-

49

5

-

24

2

-

45

2

-

45

2

-

48

6

-

31

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement